summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/4994-h
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to '4994-h')
-rw-r--r--4994-h/4994-h.htm8891
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/a251a.pngbin0 -> 16620 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/a251b.pngbin0 -> 17123 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/a252.pngbin0 -> 14997 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/a253.pngbin0 -> 15485 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/a254.pngbin0 -> 16476 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/a255.pngbin0 -> 12686 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/a256.pngbin0 -> 20396 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/a257.pngbin0 -> 19806 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/cover.jpgbin0 -> 104893 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/illus-046.jpgbin0 -> 57294 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/illus-046f.jpgbin0 -> 312973 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/illus-180.jpgbin0 -> 67021 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/illus-180f.jpgbin0 -> 357567 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/illus-193.jpgbin0 -> 61969 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/illus-193f.jpgbin0 -> 328885 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/illus-fpc.jpgbin0 -> 53710 bytes
-rw-r--r--4994-h/images/illus-fpcf.jpgbin0 -> 319990 bytes
18 files changed, 8891 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/4994-h/4994-h.htm b/4994-h/4994-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0d26f33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/4994-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,8891 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+ "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
+ <head>
+ <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" />
+ <title>Five Thousand Miles Underground, by Roy Rockwood</title>
+ <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" />
+ <meta content="images/cover.jpg" name="cover" />
+ <meta name='DC.Title' content='Five Thousand Miles Underground' />
+ <meta name='DC.Creator' content='Roy Rockwood' />
+ <meta name='DC.Language' content='en' />
+ <meta name='DC.Created' content='1908' />
+ <style type="text/css">
+ body { margin-left:8%;margin-right:10%; }
+ p { text-indent:0;margin-top:0.5em;margin-bottom:0.5em;text-align:justify; }
+ .sc { font-variant:small-caps; }
+ .larger { font-size:larger; }
+ .xlarge { font-size:x-large; }
+ .smaller { font-size:smaller; }
+ .imgleft { clear:left; float:left; margin-right:2% }
+ .imgright { clear:right; float:right; margin-left:2%; }
+ @media handheld {.imgleft { float:left; }}
+ @media handheld {.imgright { float:right; }}
+ hr.pb { page-break-before:always;border:none;border-bottom:1px solid silver;
+ margin:1em auto; }
+ @media handheld {
+ hr.pb { page-break-before:always;display:none; }
+ }
+ .container-center { text-align: center; }
+ .container-left { display: inline-block; text-align: left; }
+ td { padding-right:0.5em; }
+ .c000 { text-align:center;margin:1em auto; }
+ .c001 { width:335px;height:527px; }
+ .c002 { width:335px;height:525px; }
+ .c003 { text-align:center;margin:0 auto;width:335px; }
+ .c004 { vertical-align:top;text-align:right;width:4em; }
+ .c005 { vertical-align:bottom;text-align:left;width:17em; }
+ .c006 { text-align:center;font-weight:normal;font-size:1.4em;page-break-before:auto;
+ margin-top:1em; }
+ .c007 { text-align:center;font-weight:normal;font-size:1.2em;page-break-before:auto;
+ margin-top:2em; }
+ .c008 { text-align:center;font-weight:normal;font-size:1.2em;
+ page-break-before:always;margin-top:4em; }
+ .c009 { margin-top:2em; }
+ .c010 { width:337px;height:525px; }
+ .c011 { text-align:center;margin:0 auto;width:337px; }
+ .c012 { width:332px;height:525px; }
+ .c013 { text-align:center;margin:0 auto;width:332px; }
+ .c014 { width:338px;height:525px; }
+ .c015 { text-align:center;margin:0 auto;width:338px; }
+ .c016 { border:none;border-bottom:1px solid silver;margin-top:0.8em;
+ margin-bottom:0.8em;margin-left:35%; width:30% }
+ .c017 { width:20% }
+ .c018 { width:100% }
+ .nf-center-c { text-align:center;margin:1em 0; }
+ .nf-center { text-align:center; }
+ .nf-block-c { text-align:center;margin:1em 0; }
+ .nf-block { display:inline-block;text-align:left; }
+ </style>
+ </head>
+ <body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+Project Gutenberg's Five Thousand Miles Underground, by Roy Rockwood
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Five Thousand Miles Underground
+ The Mystery of the Centre of the Earth
+
+Author: Roy Rockwood
+
+Release Date: January 26, 2014 [EBook #4994]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: UTF-8
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FIVE THOUSAND MILES UNDERGROUND ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jim Weiler and Roger Frank
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+<div class='c000'>
+<img src='images/cover.jpg' alt='' class='c001' />
+</div>
+<hr class='pb' />
+
+<div class='c000'>
+<a href='images/illus-fpcf.jpg'><img src='images/illus-fpc.jpg' alt='' class='c002' /></a>
+<p class='c003'>THE FLYING MERMAID SANK LOWER AND LOWER TOWARD THE MYSTERIOUS HOLE.</p>
+</div>
+
+<hr class='pb' />
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ <span class='xlarge'>Five Thousand Miles Underground</span><br/>
+ <br/>
+ Or<br/>
+ <br/>
+ <span class='larger'>The Mystery of the Centre of the Earth</span><br/>
+ <br/>
+ BY<br/>
+ <br/>
+ <span class='larger'>ROY ROCKWOOD</span><br/>
+ <br/>
+ <span class='smaller'>Author of “Through the Air to the North Pole,” “Under<br/>
+ the Ocean to the South Pole,” “The Rival<br/>
+ Ocean Divers,” Etc.</span><br/>
+ <br/>
+ ILLUSTRATED<br/>
+ <br/>
+ NEW YORK<br/>
+ CUPPLES &amp; LEON COMPANY
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<hr class='pb' />
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ GOOD BOOKS FOR BOYS<br/>
+ <br/>
+ By Roy Rockwood<br/>
+ <br/>
+ THE GREAT MARVEL SERIES
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<div class='nf-block-c'>
+ <div class='nf-block'>
+ THROUGH THE AIR TO THE NORTH POLE<br/>
+ Or The Wonderful Cruise of the Electric Monarch<br/>
+ <br/>
+ UNDER THE OCEAN TO THE SOUTH POLE<br/>
+ Or The Strange Cruise of the Submarine Wonder<br/>
+ <br/>
+ FIVE THOUSAND MILES UNDERGROUND<br/>
+ Or The Mystery of the Centre of the Earth
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ Cloth. Illustrated<br/>
+ Price per volume, 60 cents
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<hr class='pb' />
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ Copyright, 1908, by<br/>
+ <span class='sc'>Cupples &amp; Leon Company</span><br/>
+ <br/>
+ <span class='smaller'>Five Thousand Miles Underground</span>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<hr class='pb' />
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ <span class='larger'>CONTENTS</span>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<div class='container-center'><div class='container-left'>
+<table summary=''>
+<tr><td class='c004'>I</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch01'>WASHINGTON BACKS OUT</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>II</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch02'>THE FLYING MERMAID</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>III</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch03'>WASHINGTON DECIDES</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>IV</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch04'>WHAT DID MARK SEE?</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>V</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch05'>ATTACKED BY A WHALE</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>VI</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch06'>THE CYCLONE</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>VII</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch07'>A QUEER SAIL</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>VIII</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch08'>THE FLYING MERMAID DISABLED</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>IX</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch09'>THE MUTINY</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>X</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch10'>FOOLING THEIR ENEMIES</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XI</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch11'>MYSTERIOUS HAPPENINGS</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XII</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch12'>THE BIG HOLE</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XIII</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch13'>DOWN INTO THE EARTH</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XIV</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch14'>MANY MILES BELOW</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XV</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch15'>IN THE STRANGE DRAUGHT</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XVI</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch16'>THE NEW LAND</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XVII</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch17'>A STRANGE COUNTRY</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XVIII</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch18'>CAUGHT BY A STRANGE PLANT</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XIX</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch19'>THE BIG PEACH</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XX</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch20'>OVERHAULING THE SHIP</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XXI</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch21'>THE FISH THAT WALKED</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XXII</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch22'>THE SNAKE-TREE</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XXIII</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch23'>THE DESERTED VILLAGE</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XXIV</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch24'>THE GIANTS</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XXV</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch25'>HELD BY THE ENEMY</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XXVII</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch26'>A FRIEND INDEED</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XXVII</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch27'>A GREAT JOURNEY</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XXVIII</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch28'>THE TEMPLE OF TREASURE</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td class='c004'>XXIX</td><td class='c005'><a href='#ch29'>BACK HOME—CONCLUSION</a></td></tr>
+</table>
+</div></div>
+
+<hr class='pb' />
+
+<h1 class='c006'>FIVE THOUSAND MILES UNDERGROUND</h1>
+
+<h2 id='ch01' class='c007'>CHAPTER I<br /><br />WASHINGTON BACKS OUT</h2>
+
+<p>“Washington! I say Washington!”</p>
+
+<p>Throughout a big shed, filled for the most part
+with huge pieces of machinery, echoed the voice
+of Professor Amos Henderson. He did not look
+up from a small engine over which he was bending.</p>
+
+<p>“Washington! Where are you? Why don’t
+you answer me?”</p>
+
+<p>From somewhere underneath an immense pile of
+iron, steel and aluminum came the voice of a colored
+man.</p>
+
+<p>“Yas sir, Perfesser, I’se goin’ t’ saggasiate my
+bodily presence in yo’ contiguous proximity an’ attend
+t’ yo’ immediate conglomerated prescriptions
+at th’ predistined period. Yas, sir!”</p>
+
+<p>“Well, Washington, if you had started when
+you began that long speech you would have been
+at least half way here by this time. Hurry up!
+Never mind tightning those bolts now. Find the
+boys. I need them to help me with this engine.
+They must be around somewhere.”</p>
+
+<p>“I seen ’em goin’ fishin’ down by th’ brook a
+little while ago,” answered the negro, crawling out
+from under what seemed to be a combined airship
+and watercraft. “Jack says as how yo’ gived him
+permission t’ occupy his indisputatious period of
+levity in endeavorin’ t’ extract from th’ liquid element
+some specimens of swimmin’ creatures.”</p>
+
+<p>“If you mean I said he and Mark could go fishing
+in the brook, you’re right, Washington,” replied
+the professor with a smile. “But you waste
+a lot of time and breath trying to say it. Why
+don’t you give up using big words?”</p>
+
+<p>“I reckon I was brought up t’ it,” replied the
+colored man grinning from ear to ear. He did
+not always use big words but when he did they
+were generally the wrong ones. Sometimes, he
+spoke quite correctly.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, I suppose you can’t help it,” resumed
+Mr. Henderson. “However, never mind that.
+Find the boys and send them to me.”</p>
+
+<p>“With th’ least appreciatableness amount of
+postponement,” answered the messenger, and he
+went out.</p>
+
+<p>Washington White, who in color was just the
+opposite to his name, a general helper and companion
+to Professor Henderson, found Mark
+Sampson and Jack Darrow about a quarter of a
+mile from the big shed, which was in the center of
+a wooded island off the coast of Maine. The lads
+were seated on the bank of a small brook, fishing.</p>
+
+<p>“Perfesser wants yo’ immediate,” said Washington.</p>
+
+<p>“But we haven’t caught a single fish,” objected
+Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Them’s the orders from headquarters,” replied
+the colored man. “Yo’ both got t’ project
+yo’selves in th’ vicinity of th’ machine shop. I
+reckon th’ new fangled contraption that th’ perfesser
+is goin’ t’ navigate th’ air an’ sail th’ angry
+seas in, am about done. He want’s t’ try th’ engine.”</p>
+
+<p>“Come on then,” said Jack. “We probably
+would not catch any fish, anyhow, Mark.”</p>
+
+<p>Accompanied by Washington, the youths, each
+of whom was about eighteen years old, started toward
+the big shed.</p>
+
+<p>While they are on their way opportunity may
+be taken to tell a little about them, as well as about
+Washington and the professor, and the curious
+craft on which the scientist was working.</p>
+
+<p>A few years before this story opens Mr. Henderson
+had invented a wonderful electric airship.
+He had it about completed when, one day, he and
+the two boys became unexpectedly acquainted, and,
+as it developed, friends.</p>
+
+<p>Mark and Jack were orphans. After having
+rather a hard time knocking about the world trying
+to make a living, they chanced to meet, and resolved
+to cast their lots together. They boarded a freight
+train, and, as told in the first volume of this series,
+entitled, “Through the Air to the North Pole; or
+the Wonderful Cruise of the Electric Monarch,”
+the cars were wrecked near where Professor Henderson
+was building his strange craft.</p>
+
+<p>The boys were cared for by the scientist, and,
+after their recovery from hurts received in the
+collision, they accepted his invitation to make the
+trip through the upper regions in the airship, to
+search for the north pole. With them went Andy
+Sudds, an old hunter, and Tom Smith and Bill
+Jones, two farmers, but who were hired as helpers
+on the voyage. The party had many adventures
+on the trip, having battles with savage animals and
+more savage Esquimaux, and were tossed about in
+terrible storms. After making some scientific observations,
+which the professor was much interested
+in, they started back home.</p>
+
+<p>Having found he could successfully sail in the
+air, Mr. Henderson resolved to try what it might
+be like under water.</p>
+
+<p>He moved his machine shop to a lonely spot on
+the Maine coast, and there, with the help of the
+boys, Washington, Andy and two machinists constructed
+a submarine boat, called the <em>Porpoise</em>.</p>
+
+<p>In this the professor resolved to seek the south
+pole, he having a theory that it was surrounded
+by an open sea. After much hard work the <em>Porpoise</em>
+was made ready for the voyage.</p>
+
+<p>What occurred on this great trip is described
+in the second book of this series, called “Under
+the Ocean to the South Pole, or the Strange Cruise
+of the Submarine Wonder.” In that is told how
+once more Tom and Bill, with Andy, the boys and
+Washington, accompanying Professor Henderson,
+had many thrilling experiences.</p>
+
+<p>They were caught in the grip of the grass of
+the terrible Sargasso Sea. Monstrous suckers
+grasped the boat in their powerful arms, and had
+to be fought off. They were caught in a sea of
+boiling water and imprisoned between big fields of
+ice.</p>
+
+<p>By means of strong diving suits they were able
+to leave the ship and walk about on the bottom
+of the sea. They visited a graveyard of sunken
+ships, saw many strange monsters as well as many
+beautiful fish in the great depths to which they
+sunk. Many times they were in dire peril but the
+resources of the professor, the bravery and daring
+of the boys, no less than the help Washington and
+Andy Sudds, the hunter, rendered at times, brought
+them through.</p>
+
+<p>Those of you who read of their adventures will
+recall the strange island which they came upon in
+the Atlantic Ocean, far from the coast of South
+America.</p>
+
+<p>When they first drew near this island they were
+almost sucked into the depths of a great whirlpool,
+caused by water pouring down a big hole that
+seemed to lead far into the earth. They reversed
+their ship just in time.</p>
+
+<p>But, on going to another side of the island they
+were able to approach safely, as at this point the
+great hole was farther from the shore. Then they
+landed and investigated.</p>
+
+<p>They found the island was almost circular, and
+the hole was also round, but not in the center of
+the land. It was an immense cavity, so wide they
+could not see across, and as for the depth they
+could only guess at it. Looking down they could
+only see rolling masses of vapor and clouds caused
+by the water which poured down from the ocean
+with the force of a Niagara.</p>
+
+<p>Gazing down into the big hole Mark suggested
+it might lead to the centre of the earth, which some
+scientists claim is hollow. The professor admitted
+that the cavity looked as though it led to China.</p>
+
+<p>They had no means of investigating further the
+mystery of the opening and returned to their submarine,
+completing the voyage to the south pole.</p>
+
+<p>It was now about two years since they had come
+back from that eventful trip. One of the first
+things the professor did, after docking the <em>Porpoise</em>,
+was to shut himself up in his study and begin
+to draw plans. To the questions of the boys he
+returned no answer for several days. Then he
+announced he was working on a craft which could
+both sail on top of the water and navigate the air.</p>
+
+<p>In time the plans were done, and, in order to
+keep the work secret, the shop was moved to an island
+which the professor owned.</p>
+
+<p>Parts of the <em>Monarch</em> and the <em>Porpoise</em> were
+used in constructing the new craft, so there was no
+need to get other help than that which the boys,
+Washington and Bill and Tom could give, since
+the two latter accepted an offer of the professor to
+remain and work for him. The boys, of course,
+would not leave their friend.</p>
+
+<p>The professor realized that he had a more difficult
+task in his new venture than he had set himself
+on other occasions. For a ship to be light
+enough to rise in the air, and, at another time, and
+with no change, to be strong enough to navigate
+the ocean, was indeed something to tax Mr. Henderson’s
+ingenuity.</p>
+
+<p>However, in the course of a little over a year
+the larger part of the work was done. Inside the
+big shed was the huge affair which, it was hoped,
+would enable its owner to be master of both air
+and water.</p>
+
+<p>“Did the professor say anything special?”
+asked Mark of Washington.</p>
+
+<p>“Nope. I reckon he were too busy problamatin’
+the exact altitude projected in an inverse
+direction by th’ square root of th’ new engine when
+operated at a million times inside of a few seconds,
+but he didn’t say nothin’ t’ me. I were busy
+underneath th’ ship, fixin’ bolts when he tole me t’
+find yo’. I wouldn’t be s’prised if he had th’ thing
+goin’ soon.”</p>
+
+<p>“Do you think he’ll be generating the new gas
+to-day?” asked Jack eagerly. “That’s the most
+troublesome part; to get that gas right.”</p>
+
+<p>“He didn’t say nothin’ t’ me 'bout it,” Washington
+stated, as he walked along beside the two
+boys. “He jest seemed anxious like.”</p>
+
+<p>“We’d better hurry,” advised Mark. “He
+may be at an important part in his experiments and
+probably needs us. I hope it will work. He has
+spent many days on it, and we all have worked
+hard. It ought to be a success.”</p>
+
+<p>“Perfesser allers makes things work,” declared
+Washington stoutly.</p>
+
+<p>“That’s a good way to feel about it, anyway,”
+observed Mark. “Well, we’ll soon know.”</p>
+
+<p>The three hurried to the shed which they could
+see as they rounded a turn of the path through
+the wood. They noticed an elderly man approaching
+with a gun on his shoulder. On one arm he
+carried a game bag.</p>
+
+<p>“Guess Andy got something for dinner,” remarked
+Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“I hopes so, honey,” put in Washington. “I’se
+got a sort of gone feelin’ in my stomach!”</p>
+
+<p>“Any luck, Andy?” called Mark, when he
+came within hailing distance.</p>
+
+<p>“Fine,” replied Andy Sudds. “Rabbits and
+quail. We’ll have a good dinner to-morrow.”</p>
+
+<p>While Andy entered the living part of the big
+shed to put away his gun and game, the boys and
+Washington kept on to the engine room. They
+found the professor, with Bill and Tom, busy fitting
+pipes to the small engine which was set up at
+one side of the structure.</p>
+
+<p>“Come, boys, I need your aid,” remarked Mr.
+Henderson as they entered. “Take off your coats
+and pitch in. Tighten up these bolts, Jack.
+Mark, you mix up those chemicals the way I taught
+you, and see that the dynamo is in working order
+for Washington to attend to.”</p>
+
+<p>In a little while the shop was a veritable hive of
+industry, and it resounded to the sound of hammers,
+wrenches and machinery. In the background
+was the big ship, which seemed like two immense
+cigars, one above the other, the lower one
+the larger.</p>
+
+<p>“Where was you calalatin’ t’ take this here ship
+when it gits done, Perfesser?” asked Washington,
+during a lull in the operations.</p>
+
+<p>“Do you remember that big hole in the island
+we visited on our trip to the south pole?”</p>
+
+<p>“I suah does,” answered the colored man.</p>
+
+<p>“We are going to explore that,” went on the
+scientist. “We are going to make a voyage to the
+interior of the earth in our <em>Flying Mermaid</em>.”</p>
+
+<p>“Go down into th’ earth!” exclaimed Washington,
+his eyes big with fright.</p>
+
+<p>“Certainly; why not?”</p>
+
+<p>“Not for mine!” cried the colored man, dropping
+the wrench he was holding. “No sir! I’m
+not goin’ t’ project myself int’ a grave while I’se
+alive. Time enough when I kicks th’ bucket. No
+sir! If yo’ an’ the boys wants t’ risk yo’ se’ves
+goin’ down int’ th’ interior of th’ earth, where th’
+Bible says there’s fiery furnaces, yo’ kin go, but
+Washington White stays on terra cotta! That’s
+where he stays; He ain’t ready t’ be buried, not
+jest yet!” and the frightened colored man started
+to leave the shed.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch02' class='c008'>CHAPTER II<br /><br />THE FLYING MERMAID</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>“Here! Stop him!” cried Professor Henderson.
+“Don’t let him get away. We still need
+his help to get the ship in shape. He needn’t
+be frightened. We’re not going to start at once.”</p>
+
+<p>Mark and Jack ran after Washington, whose
+progress was somewhat impeded because he kept
+looking back as if he feared the new ship was chasing
+him.</p>
+
+<p>“Come on back!” said Mark. “There’s no
+danger, and if there was we’re not going to start
+to-day.”</p>
+
+<p>“Ain’t yo’ foolin’ me?” asked Washington,
+pausing and looking doubtfully at the boys.</p>
+
+<p>“Of course not,” answered Mark. “You
+know Professor Henderson would not make you
+do anything you didn’t want to do, Wash. He
+wishes you to stay and help him get ready, that’s
+all.”</p>
+
+<p>“Well, Washington,” observed the aged scientist.
+“I didn’t think you’d go back on me.”</p>
+
+<p>“I’d do mos’ anything fer yo’, Perfesser,” said
+the colored man, “but I got t’ beg off this time,”
+and he looked at the <em>Flying Mermaid</em> as if he
+thought the metal sides would open and devour
+him.</p>
+
+<p>“Then help me get things in shape to generate
+the gas,” the scientist said. “I want to give the
+new vapor the first real test in lifting power to-day.
+On the success of it depends the future of
+the ship.”</p>
+
+<p>Seeing there was no immediate danger of being
+carried to the centre of the earth, Washington resumed
+his labors. The professor, the boys, Bill
+and Tom were also hurrying matters to enable a
+test to be made before night.</p>
+
+<p>As will readily be seen, even by those not familiar
+with the construction of airships and submarines,
+the chief problem was to find some agent
+strong enough to lift from the earth a weight heavier
+than had ever before been put into an apparatus
+that was destined to traverse the clouds. For the
+<em>Flying Mermaid</em> was not only an airship but an
+ocean voyager as well. It had to be made light
+enough to be lifted far above the earth, yet the
+very nature of it, necessitating it being made heavy
+enough to stand the buffeting of the waves and the
+pressure of water, was against its flying abilities.</p>
+
+<p>Professor Henderson realized this and knew
+that the chief concern would be to discover a gas
+or vapor with five times the lifting power of hydrogen,
+one of the lightest gases known, and one
+sometimes used to inflate balloons.</p>
+
+<p>After long study he had been partially successful,
+but he knew from experiments made that the
+gas he had so far been able to manufacture would
+not answer. What he wanted was some element
+that could be mixed with the gas, to neutralize the
+attraction of gravitation, or downward pull of the
+earth.</p>
+
+<p>While he was seeking this, and experimenting
+on many lines, the construction of the air-water
+ship went on. In general the outward construction
+was two cigar shaped hulls, one above the
+other. Aluminum, being the lightest and strongest
+metal that could be used for the purpose, formed
+the main part of both bodies.</p>
+
+<p>The upper hull was one hundred feet long and
+twenty feet in diameter at the widest part. It
+tapered to points at either end. It was attached to
+the lower hull by strong braces, at either end, while
+from the center there extended a pipe which connected
+with the lower section. This pipe was intended
+to convey the lifting gas to the part which
+corresponded to the bag of the balloon, save that it
+was of metal instead of silk, or rubber as is usual.</p>
+
+<p>There were two reasons for this. One was that
+it would not be liable to puncture, particularly in
+the proposed underground trip, and the other was
+that it did not have to be so large as a cloth bag
+would have had to be. It was also a permanent
+part of the ship, and on a voyage where part of the
+time the travelers would be in the air and part on
+the water, and when the change from one to the
+other would have to be made quickly, this was necessary.
+It would have taken too long to raise the
+ship in the air had a cloth bag been used to contain
+the gas.</p>
+
+<p>The lower hull or main part of the craft was one
+hundred and fifty feet long, and forty feet
+through at the largest part, in the centre.</p>
+
+<p>It was divided into four sections. The forward
+one contained the sleeping quarters of Professor
+Henderson and his crew. There was a small stateroom
+for each one. Above was a conning or observation
+tower, reached by a small flight of steps.
+From this tower the ship could be steered, stopped
+and started, as could also be done from the engine
+room, which was in the after part of the hull.</p>
+
+<p>As in the <em>Porpoise</em> and <em>Monarch</em>, electricity
+formed the motive power and was also used for
+many other purposes on board. Engines operated
+by gas produced the current which heated, lighted
+and moved the ship, as well as played a part in
+producing the wonderful gas.</p>
+
+<p>The ship moved forward or backward by means
+of a novel arrangement. This was by the power
+of compressed air. From either end of the lower
+hull there projected a short pipe working in a ball
+and socket joint, so it could be turned in any direction.
+By means of strong pumps a current of
+compressed air could be sent out from either pipe.
+Thus when floating above the earth the ship was
+forced forward by the blast of air rushing
+from the pipe at the stern. It was the same principle
+as that on which a sky rocket is shot heavenward,
+save that gases produced by the burning of
+powder in the pasteboard rocket form its moving
+impulse.</p>
+
+<p>In the case of the <em>Flying Mermaid</em>, it could be
+made to move backward by sending the air out of
+the forward tube. Thus, when in the water, the
+compressed air rushing from the pipe struck the
+fluid and forced the ship forward or backward as
+was desired. It floated on the surface, the deck
+being about three feet out of water, while the aluminum
+gas bag was overhead.</p>
+
+<p>The engine room was a marvel of machine construction.
+It contained pumps for air and water,
+motors, dynamos, gas engines, and a maze of
+wheels and levers. Yet everything was very compact
+and no room was wasted.</p>
+
+<p>The use of the air method of propulsion did
+away with the necessity of a large propellor such
+as most airships have to use, a propellor which
+must of necessity be very light and which is easily
+broken.</p>
+
+<p>Next to the engine room was the kitchen. It
+contained an electric range and all necessary appliances
+and utensils for preparing meals. There
+were lockers and a large reserve storeroom which
+when the time came would be well stocked with
+food. Forward of the kitchen was the living and
+dining room. It contained comfortable seats,
+folding tables and a small library. Here, also
+were many instruments designed to show how the
+various machines were working. There were
+gages, pointers and dials, which told the direction
+the ship was traveling, the speed and the distance
+above the earth or below the surface. Similar
+indicators were in the conning tower, which had
+a powerful search light.</p>
+
+<p>The ship was lighted throughout by incandescent
+lamps, and there was even a small automatic piano
+worked by the electric current, on which popular
+airs could be played.</p>
+
+<p>If the gas and the gravity neutralizer worked
+as Professor Henderson hoped they would, as soon
+as the ship was completed, all that would be necessary
+to start on the voyage would be to fill the
+aluminum bag and set the air compressor in motion.</p>
+
+<p>The gas was made from common air, chemically
+treated and with a secret material added which by
+means of a complicated machine in a measure did
+away with the downward pull of the earth. Thus
+all that was necessary to carry on a long voyage was
+a quantity of gasolene to operate the engine which
+worked the electric machines, and some of this secret
+compound.</p>
+
+<p>The professor and his helpers had been working
+to good advantage. At last all was in readiness
+for the gas test.</p>
+
+<p>It was proposed to try it on an experimental scale.
+Some of the fluid was to be generated and forced
+into an aluminum cylinder under the same pressure
+it would be used in the air ship. To this cylinder
+were attached weights in proportion to the weight
+of the <em>Flying Mermaid</em> with its load of human
+freight, engines and equipment.</p>
+
+<p>“This cylinder is just one one-hundredth the
+size of the cylinder of the ship,” said the professor.
+“I am going to fasten to it a hundred pound
+weight. If it lifts that our latest contrivance will
+be a success.”</p>
+
+<p>“You mean if the little cylinder pulls a hundred
+pounds up the big ship will take us and the machinery
+up?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Certainly,” answered the professor. “If this
+cylinder lifts a hundred pounds, one a hundred
+times as big (as that of the <em>Mermaid</em> is), will lift
+a hundred times as much, or ten thousand pounds.
+That is five tons, or more than a ton over what I
+figure to be the weight of our ship and contents.
+The latest war balloon can lift one ton with ease,
+and if my machine can not do five times as well I
+shall be disappointed.”</p>
+
+<p>The last adjustments were made, pipes were run
+from the gas generator to the cylinder, and the
+hundred pound weight was attached.</p>
+
+<p>“Everybody look out now,” said Mr. Henderson.
+“I am going to start the machine and let
+the gas enter the cylinder. It is a very powerful
+gas and may break the cylinder. If it does you
+must all duck.”</p>
+
+<p>The scientist gave a last look at everything.
+The boys got behind some boards whence they
+could see without being in danger. Washington,
+who had little fear so long as there was no danger
+of going under ground, took his place at the dynamo.
+Andy Sudds, with Bill and Tom, stationed
+themselves in safe places.</p>
+
+<p>“All ready!” called the professor.</p>
+
+<p>He pulled a lever toward him, turned a wheel
+and signalled to Washington to start the dynamo.
+There was a sound of buzzing machinery, which
+was followed by a hiss as the gas began to enter
+the cylinder under pressure. Would it stand the
+strain? That question was uppermost in every
+one’s mind save the professor’s. He only cared
+to see the cylinder leave the ground, carrying the
+weight with it. That would prove his long labors
+were crowned with success.</p>
+
+<p>Faster and faster whirred the dynamo. The
+gas was being generated from the air. The secret
+chemical made a hissing which could be heard for
+some distance. The gage registered a heavy pressure.
+Anxiously the professor watched the cylinder.</p>
+
+<p>“There!” he exclaimed at length. “It has all
+the gas it can hold. Now to see if it works!”</p>
+
+<p>He disconnected the pipe leading from the generator.
+This left the cylinder free. It seemed to
+tremble slightly. There appeared to be a movement
+to the hundred pound weight which rested on
+the ground. It was as if it was tugging to get
+loose.</p>
+
+<p>“There it goes! There it goes!” cried Mark,
+joyfully.</p>
+
+<p>“Hurrah!” shouted Jack. “There she rises!”</p>
+
+<p>“It suttinly am projectin’ itself skyward!”
+yelled Washington, coming from the dynamo.</p>
+
+<p>Sure enough the cylinder was slowly rising in
+the air, bearing the weight with it. It had lifted
+it clear from the ground and was approaching the
+roof of the big shed.</p>
+
+<p>“It will work! It will work!” exclaimed the
+professor, strangely excited.</p>
+
+<p>The next instant the cylinder, carrying the
+weight, sailed right out of an open skylight, and
+began drifting outside the shop, and across the
+fields.</p>
+
+<p>“Quick! We must get it back!” cried Mr.
+Henderson. “If it gets away my secret may be
+discovered and I will lose all! We must secure
+it!”</p>
+
+<p>But the cylinder was now two hundred feet in
+the air and being blown to the east, the weight
+dangling below it, making it look like a miniature
+airship.</p>
+
+<p>“We can never catch that!” cried Mark.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch03' class='c008'>CHAPTER III<br /><br />WASHINGTON DECIDES</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>“We must catch that cylinder!” the professor
+exclaimed. “Some one may find it when it comes
+down and analyze the gas. Then he would discover
+how to make it. The cylinder must come
+down!”</p>
+
+<p>“Don’t see how we can proximate ourselves
+inter th’ vicinity of it lessen we delegate th’ imperial
+functions of ornithological specimens t’ some
+member of this here party,” observed Washington.</p>
+
+<p>“If you mean we can’t catch that there contraption
+unless we turn into birds I’ll show you that
+you’re mistaken!” cried Andy Sudds. “I guess
+I have a trick or two up my sleeve,” and the old
+hunter quickly threw open the breech of his gun
+and inserted a couple of cartridges.</p>
+
+<p>He raised the piece to his shoulder and took
+quick aim. There was a sliver of flame, a puff of
+smoke and a sharp report. The professor and the
+boys who were watching the cylinder saw it vibrate
+up in the air. Then there came a whistling sound.
+An instant later the metal body began to descend,
+and it and the weight fell to the earth.</p>
+
+<p>“I’m sorry I had to put a bullet through it,
+Professor,” said old Andy with a queer smile, “but
+it was the only way I saw of bringing it down.
+Hope it isn’t damaged much.”</p>
+
+<p>“It doesn’t matter if it is,” the scientist answered.
+“I can make more cylinders, but I don’t
+want that secret of the gas to become known.
+Your bullet served a good turn, Andy, for it let
+the compressed vapor out just in time.”</p>
+
+<p>“Then we may consider the experiment a success,”
+said Mark, as Washington went to where
+the cylinder had fallen, to detach it from the
+weight and bring both to the shed.</p>
+
+<p>“It seems so,” Mr. Henderson answered.
+“True, it was only an experiment. We have yet
+to test the ship itself.”</p>
+
+<p>“When can we do that?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“I hope by Monday,” the scientist answered.</p>
+
+<p>“Will you try it in the water or air first?”
+asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“I’m almost certain it will float in the water,”
+the aged inventor said. “It does not require much
+work to make a ship which will do that. But the
+air proposition is another matter. However, since
+the cylinder rose, I am pretty sure the <em>Flying Mermaid</em>
+will.</p>
+
+<p>“But we have done enough work to-day. Let’s
+rest and have something to eat. Then, with Sunday
+to sit around and talk matters over, we will
+be ready for Monday’s test.”</p>
+
+<p>Some of the game Andy had killed was soon on
+the table, for Washington, in addition to his other
+accomplishments, was an expert cook. During
+the evening the boys and their friends sat in the
+living room of the big shed and talked over the
+events of the day.</p>
+
+<p>Sunday was spent in discussing what adventures
+might lie before them should they be able to descend
+into the big hole. Washington did not say
+much, but it was easy to see he had no notion of
+going. He even began to pack his few belongings
+in readiness to leave the service of Mr. Henderson,
+for whom he had worked a good many
+years.</p>
+
+<p>No one remained long abed Monday morning.
+Even Washington was up early in spite of the interest
+he had lost in the professor’s voyage.</p>
+
+<p>“I jest wants t’ see yo’ start fer that place where
+they buries live folks,” he said.</p>
+
+<p>In order to properly test the <em>Flying Mermaid</em>
+it was necessary to move the craft from the shed
+from which place it had never been taken since it’s
+construction was started. It had been built on big
+rollers in anticipation of this need, so that all which
+was now necessary was to open the doors at the
+end, and roll the craft out.</p>
+
+<p>This was accomplished with no small amount of
+labor, and it was nearly noon before the big ship
+was moved into the open. It was shoved along to
+a little clearing in front of the shed, where no trees
+would interfere with its possible upward movement.</p>
+
+<p>Everyone was bustling about. The professor
+was busiest of all. He went from one machine to
+another; from this apparatus to that, testing here,
+turning wheels there, adjusting valves and seeing
+that all was in readiness for the generating of the
+powerful gas.</p>
+
+<p>As the airship was half round on the bottom and
+as it rested in a sort of semi-circular cradle; it
+brought the entrance some distance above the
+ground. To make it easier to get in and out while
+preparations for the trial were going on, Bill and
+Tom had made an improvised pair of steps, which
+were tied to the side of the ship with ropes.</p>
+
+<p>Up and down these the professor, the boys and
+Andy went, taking in tools and materials, and removing
+considerable refuse which had accumulated
+during the building of the craft.</p>
+
+<p>Finally all was in readiness for starting the making
+of the gas. The ship was not wholly complete
+and no supplies or provisions for the long voyage
+had been taken aboard. The <em>Flying Mermaid</em>
+was about a ton lighter than it would be when fully
+fitted out, but to make up for this the professor
+had left in the ship a lot of tools and surplus machinery
+so that the craft held as much weight as
+it would under normal conditions. If the gas
+lifted it now it would at any other time.</p>
+
+<p>“Start the generator,” said Mr. Henderson, to
+Mark. “We’ll soon see whether we are going to
+succeed or fail.”</p>
+
+<p>The boy turned a number of levers and wheels.
+The machine which made the powerful vapor was
+soon in operation. The professor had already
+added enough of the secret compound to the tank
+containing the other ingredients, and the big pump
+was sucking in air to be transformed into the lifting
+gas.</p>
+
+<p>The boys and the professor were in the engine
+room. Andy Sudds, with Bill and Tom, had taken
+their places in the living room, to more evenly balance
+the ship, since the things in it were not yet all
+in their proper places. As for Washington he was
+busy running from the shed to the ship with various
+tools and bits of machinery the professor desired.</p>
+
+<p>The gas was being generated rapidly. Throughout
+the ship there resounded a hissing noise that
+told it was being forced through the pipe into the
+aluminum shell above the ship proper.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder how soon it will begin to lift us,”
+said Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“It will take about half an hour,” replied Mr.
+Henderson. “You see we have first to fill the
+holder completely, since there is no gas in it. After
+this we will keep some on hand, so that it will
+only need the addition of a small quantity to enable
+the ship to rise.”</p>
+
+<p>He was busy watching the pointer on a dial
+which indicated the pressure of the gas, and the
+lifting force. The boys were kept busy making
+adjustments to the machinery and oiling bearings.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly, throughout the length of the craft
+there was felt a curious trembling. It was as
+though the screw of a powerful steamer was revolving
+in the water.</p>
+
+<p>“What is it?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“I hope it is the lifting power of the gas making
+itself felt,” the professor answered. “Perhaps
+the <em>Flying Mermaid</em> is getting ready to try
+her wings.”</p>
+
+<p>The trembling became more pronounced. The
+gas was being generated faster than ever. The
+whole ship was trembling. Tom and Bill came
+from the room, where they were stationed, to
+inquire the meaning, but were reassured by the professor.</p>
+
+<p>“Don’t be alarmed if you find yourselves up in
+the air pretty soon,” he remarked with a smile.
+“Remember the <em>Electric Monarch</em>, and the flights
+she took. We may not go as high as we did in
+her, but it will answer the same purpose.”</p>
+
+<p>The gas was hissing through the big tube as it
+rushed into the overhead holder. The gage indicated
+a heavy pressure. The ship began to tremble
+more violently and to sway slightly from side
+to side.</p>
+
+<p>“I think we shall rise presently,” said Mr. Henderson.
+His voice showed the pride he felt at the
+seeming success with which his invention was about
+to meet.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly, with a little jerk, as though some one
+with a giant hand had plucked the <em>Flying Mermaid</em>
+from the earth, the ship gave a little bound
+into the air, and was floating free.</p>
+
+<p>“Here we go!” cried Mr. Henderson. “The
+ship is a success. Now we’re off for the hole in
+the earth!”</p>
+
+<p>The <em>Flying Mermaid</em> was indeed rising in the
+air. True it did not go up so swiftly as had the
+<em>Monarch</em>, but then it was a much heavier and
+stronger vessel, and flying was only one of its accomplishments.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s a success! It’s a success!” shouted Mark,
+capering about in his excitement.</p>
+
+<p>“Now we’ll see what the centre of the earth
+looks like,” went on Jack. “I can hardly wait
+for the time to come when we are to start on the
+voyage.”</p>
+
+<p>At that instant, when the ship was but a few
+feet from the ground, but slowly rising, the boys
+and the professor heard a shouting below them.</p>
+
+<p>“What’s that?” asked the scientist. “Is any
+one hurt?”</p>
+
+<p>Mark ran to a small window, something like a
+port hole in an ocean steamer, and looked out.</p>
+
+<p>“Quick!” he shouted. “Stop the ship!
+Washington will be killed!”</p>
+
+<p>In fact from the agonized yells which proceeded
+from somewhere under the craft it seemed that
+the accident was in process of happening.</p>
+
+<p>“Save me! Save me!” cried the colored man.
+“I’m goin’ to fall! Catch me, some one!”</p>
+
+<p>“What is it?” asked the professor, making
+ready to shut off the power and let the ship settle
+back to earth, from which it had moved about
+fifty feet.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s Washington,” explained Mark. “He evidently
+tried to walk up the steps just as the boat
+mounted skyward. He rolled down and managed
+to grab the end of the rope which was left over
+after the steps were tied. Now he’s swinging
+down there.”</p>
+
+<p>“Are you going to lower the ship?” asked
+Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“Of course!” exclaimed the professor. “I
+only hope he hangs on until his feet touch the
+earth.”</p>
+
+<p>“Keep a tight hold!” shouted Mark, from
+out of the small window.</p>
+
+<p>“That’s th’ truest thing yo’ ever said!” exclaimed
+Washington. “You bet I’m goin’ to hold
+on, and I’m comin’ up too,” which he proceeded
+to do, hand over hand, like a sailor.</p>
+
+<p>The boys and the professor watched the colored
+man’s upward progress. The ship had hardly
+begun to settle as, in the excitement, not enough
+gas had been let out. Closer and closer came
+Washington, until he was able to grasp the edge
+of the opening, to which the steps were fastened.</p>
+
+<p>“I thought you weren’t coming with us,” observed
+the professor, when he saw that his helper
+was safe.</p>
+
+<p>“I changed my mind,” said the colored man.
+“It’s jest luck. Seems like th’ ship done wanted
+me t’ go 'long, an’ I’m goin’. I’ll take my chances
+on bein’ buried alive. I ain’t never seen th’ centre
+of th’ earth, an’ I want’s to 'fore I die. I’m goin’
+'long, Perfessor!”</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch04' class='c008'>CHAPTER IV<br /><br />WHAT DID MARK SEE?</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>“Well, I’m glad you’ve decided at last,” the
+professor remarked. “Now come inside and we’ll
+see how the ship works.”</p>
+
+<p>Once over his fright, Washington made himself
+at home on the craft he had helped build.
+He went from one room to another and observed
+the engine.</p>
+
+<p>“She certainly am workin’” he observed with
+pride. “Are we still goin’ up, Perfessor?”</p>
+
+<p>“Still mounting,” replied Mr. Henderson.
+“We are now three hundred feet above the earth,”
+he added as he glanced at a registering gage.</p>
+
+<p>The great air pump was set going and soon
+from the after tube, a big stream of the compressed
+vapor rushed. It acted on the ship instantly
+and sent the craft ahead at a rapid rate.
+By elevating or depressing the tube the craft could
+be sent obliquely up or down. Then, by forcing
+the air from the forward tube, the <em>Mermaid</em> was
+reversed and scudded backward.</p>
+
+<p>But it was more with the ship’s ability to rise
+and descend that Professor Henderson was concerned,
+since on that depended their safety. So
+various tests were made, in generating the gas
+and using the negative gravity apparatus.</p>
+
+<p>All worked to perfection. Obeying the slightest
+turn of the wheels and levers the <em>Mermaid</em> rose or
+fell. She stood still, suspended herself in the air,
+or rushed backward and forward.</p>
+
+<p>Of course the machinery was new and did not
+operate as smoothly as it would later, but the
+professor and his friends were very well satisfied.</p>
+
+<p>“Now we’ll try something new,” said the scientist
+to the two boys as they stood beside him
+in the tower. “I only hope this part succeeds,
+and we shall soon be off on our voyage.”</p>
+
+<p>He turned several levers. There was a hissing
+sound as the gas rushed from the container, and
+the ship began to settle down.</p>
+
+<p>“What’s th’ matter? Are we goin’ t’ hit th’
+earth?” yelled Washington, rushing from the engine
+room.</p>
+
+<p>“Keep quiet,” ordered the professor. “We
+are only going down, that’s all.”</p>
+
+<p>“But good land! Perfesser!” exclaimed the
+colored man. “The ocean’s right under us! You
+forgot you sailed away from the island! We’ll
+be drowned suah!”</p>
+
+<p>“Leave it to me,” said Mr. Henderson. “The
+<em>Flying Mermaid</em> is going to take a bath!”</p>
+
+<p>“As long as it swims it will be all right,” observed
+Mark in a low tone to Jack. “I’m glad
+I can take care of myself in the water.”</p>
+
+<p>Before Jack could reply the <em>Mermaid</em> seemed
+to take a sudden dive through the air. The next
+instant she struck the water with a splash that
+sent the waves rolling all about. The craft rocked
+violently to and fro on the surface of the sea. For
+a while there were anxious hearts aboard, for there
+was no certainty but that the ship might not sink
+to the bottom.</p>
+
+<p>But the old professor had not calculated and
+builded in vain. After rocking about like a vessel
+newly launched, the strange craft rode safely and
+upright on the water. It set down far enough
+to bring the propelling tubes well under, but not
+so far but that the conning tower was well out
+and there was a small deck available.</p>
+
+<p>“Now to see if we can conquer the water as
+we did the air!” cried the professor. “Mark,
+start the air pump. Jack, you steer, for I want
+to watch the machinery under the additional
+strain.”</p>
+
+<p>From the rear tube rushed such a volume of
+air that the ocean near it bubbled and foamed.
+The ship trembled from stem to stern, and then,
+after hanging for an instant as if undecided what
+to do, it began to move forward as easily as
+though it had never sailed any other element than
+the sea.</p>
+
+<p>“She fits her name!” the professor cried.
+“She is indeed the <em>Flying Mermaid</em>, for she sails
+the ocean as easily as she navigates in the clouds!”</p>
+
+<p>For a mile or two the craft was sent ahead over
+the waves. Then it was reversed and run backwards.
+Satisfied that his long months of work
+had not gone for naught, the professor after trying
+several experiments, decided to try and raise the
+ship while in motion.</p>
+
+<p>With Jack and Mark to look after the air
+pumps, while Washington, Tom and Bill busied
+themselves in the engine room, Mr. Henderson
+began to generate the gas and start the negative
+gravity apparatus. All the while the craft was
+forging ahead.</p>
+
+<p>There was again the hissing sound that told of
+the aluminum holder being filled. For a few minutes
+there seemed to be no change, the <em>Mermaid</em>
+plowing forward.</p>
+
+<p>Then like a bird rising from the waves, or
+like a flying fish leaping from the sea to escape
+some pursuing monster of the deep, the new ship
+shot up diagonally from the surface and winged
+its way into the upper regions of the air.</p>
+
+<p>“Success! Success!” cried the professor. “This
+proves all I wanted to know. Now we are ready
+for our great trip!”</p>
+
+<p>Great were the rejoicings in the camp that night.
+It was like living over again the days when they
+were aboard the diving <em>Porpoise</em> or the flying
+<em>Monarch</em>. To the recollections were added the
+anticipations of what was before them in the trip
+to the interior of the earth.</p>
+
+<p>Busy days followed, for there was still much
+to be done to the <em>Flying Mermaid</em>. The machinery,
+which was only partly completed, had to be
+finished. Besides this the professor was working
+on some apparatus, the use of which he did not
+disclose to any one. It was stored aboard the
+ship at the last minute.</p>
+
+<p>Plenty of provisions had to be taken aboard,
+and many supplies needed to work the <em>Mermaid</em>
+and insure that it would go to the end of the
+voyage. The materials for generating the gas
+and negative gravity, spare parts, records for the
+automatic piano and other things were stored
+away.</p>
+
+<p>Some guns and ammunition were taken along as
+were a few revolvers, since old Andy had said it
+was best to prepare for any thing in the shape
+of enemies or wild beasts that might be met with
+in the interior regions.</p>
+
+<p>It was decided to make the start by sailing along
+the surface of the sea for several days, as in the
+event of any weakness in the machinery being
+discovered there would be less danger. If, at
+the end of four days, no trouble developed, the
+professor said he would send the <em>Mermaid</em> into
+the air and make the rest of the voyage through
+the sky.</p>
+
+<p>The night before the start was to be made the
+professor, with the boys, Washington and the
+other helpers, went about through the various
+shops and buildings, locking them up securely.
+For they could not tell how long they would be
+away, and they had to leave behind much valuable
+material.</p>
+
+<p>As there were several things that needed attention
+they divided the work up. Mark had finished
+his share and was walking back toward the
+living cabin where they were all quartered, when,
+down at the shore, near where the boat was
+moored, he fancied he saw, in the gathering darkness,
+a moving figure.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder who that can be,” he thought. “All
+the others are near the machine shop, for I just
+left them there. Perhaps it’s some one trying to
+spy out how the <em>Mermaid</em> is built.”</p>
+
+<p>Knowing the professor wanted his secret well
+guarded, Mark walked softly toward the little
+dock that served as a place whence the <em>Mermaid</em>
+could be easily boarded. As he approached he
+saw the figure moving. Something struck the boy
+as peculiar.</p>
+
+<p>Though the object had some of the characteristics
+of a man it did not walk like a human being,
+but shuffled along more like a huge ape or monkey.
+It seemed bent over, as if it stooped toward the
+ground.</p>
+
+<p>“Who are you?” called Mark suddenly.</p>
+
+<p>For an instant the figure halted and then hurried
+on faster than before, with a curious, shuffling
+walk. It was approaching the ship.</p>
+
+<p>Somehow it struck Mark as if it was an uncanny
+being; an inhabitant of some other world. Then
+he laughed at his half-fear, and started on a run
+toward the dock.</p>
+
+<p>“If it’s some tramp trying to find a place to
+sleep he’d better not go aboard the ship, he might
+do some damage,” the boy thought.</p>
+
+<p>He could hardly see the figure now as it had
+passed into the shadow cast by the boat. He was
+about to summon the professor to make an investigation,
+when Washington started going the
+search light which was placed just over the door
+of the living cabin. It was kept there as a sort of
+beacon light, as, near the island was a dangerous
+ledge of rocks.</p>
+
+<p>Then, in the blinding white glare from the big
+lantern as Washington accidentally swung it toward
+the <em>Mermaid</em>, Mark beheld a strange sight.</p>
+
+<p>The figure he had been watching stood out in
+bold relief. Though it was shaped like a human
+being it was not like any person the boy had ever
+seen. It seemed covered with a skin twice too
+large for it; a skin, which, in spite of the clothes
+that concealed it, hung in folds about the arms
+and legs, dropping pendent like from the neck like
+a big garment, and flapping in the wind.</p>
+
+<p>For an instant Mark was so startled he cried
+out, and the professor and the others ran to see
+what was the matter.</p>
+
+<p>“There—by the ship! A horrible creature!”
+exclaimed Mark.</p>
+
+<p>Shouting to Washington to keep the light steady
+in the direction of the dock, Mr. Henderson ran
+toward the moored <em>Mermaid</em>. Jack, Andy, Bill
+and Tom, with Mark in the rear followed him.</p>
+
+<p>“Nothing here,” said the scientist, after a careful
+search about. “Are you sure you saw something,
+Mark?”</p>
+
+<p>“Positively,” replied the lad with a shudder.
+He described the vision of the darkness.</p>
+
+<p>“I guess it was a big otter, or maybe an enormous
+turtle,” the professor said.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch05' class='c008'>CHAPTER V<br /><br />ATTACKED BY A WHALE</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>But Mark was certain it was nothing like that,
+though a careful search failed to reveal anything
+or any person near the ship. It was too dark to
+examine for footprints, and even Mark, after taking
+a look all about, felt he might have been deceived
+by shadows. Still he was a little nervous,
+and could hardly sleep for imagining what the
+thing he saw could have been.</p>
+
+<p>The next day every one was so busy that no
+one, not even Mark, recalled the little excitement
+of the night before. Shortly after noon, final
+preparations having been made, they all got
+aboard the <em>Mermaid</em> and started off.</p>
+
+<p>It was a bright sunshiny day, and the craft,
+speeding away from the island where it had been
+constructed, over the dancing blue waves, must
+have presented a strange sight had there been any
+spectators. For surely no such ship had ever
+before sailed those waters.</p>
+
+<p>However, there was no other vessel in sight,
+and the island, as far as the professor and his
+friends knew, had never been inhabited.</p>
+
+<p>“We will not try for any great speed,” Mr.
+Henderson remarked as he, with Mark and Jack,
+stood in the conning tower managing the <em>Mermaid</em>.
+“We don’t want to strain any joints at
+the start or heat any engine bearings. There will
+be time enough for speed later.”</p>
+
+<p>“Yes, and we may need it more when we get
+into the centre of the earth than we do now,”
+observed Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Why so?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“No telling what we may run up against underneath
+the ground,” went on Mark. “We may
+have to fight strange animals and stranger beings.
+Besides, the atmosphere and water there can’t be
+the same as up here; do you think so, Professor?”</p>
+
+<p>For a few minutes the scientist was silent. He
+seemed to be thinking deeply.</p>
+
+<p>“I will tell you what I believe,” he said at
+length. “I have never spoken of it before, but
+now that we are fairly started and may eventually
+have a chance to prove my theory, I will say that
+I think the centre of this earth on which we live
+is hollow. Inside of it, forming a core, so to
+speak, I believe there is another earth, similar to
+ours in some respects which revolves inside this
+larger sphere.”</p>
+
+<p>They were well out to sea now, as they could
+observe when they emerged on the little deck.
+Above their heads was the aluminum gas holder,
+which served as a sort of protection from the sun
+that was quite warm. The <em>Mermaid</em> rode with
+an easy motion, being submerged just enough to
+make her steady, yet not deep enough to encounter
+much resistance from the water. In fact it could
+not have been arranged better for speed or comfort.</p>
+
+<p>“I think we will sail well to the eastward before
+making our course south,” Mr. Henderson said.
+“I do not care to meet too many ships, as those
+aboard will be very curious and I do not want
+too much news of this venture to get out. We
+will take an unfrequented route and avoid delays
+by being hailed by every passing vessel whose
+captain will wonder what queer craft he had met
+with.”</p>
+
+<p>The boys enjoyed the sail, for the weather could
+not have been better. Even old Andy, who seldom
+said much, seemed delighted with the prospect of
+having strange adventures. He had his rifle with
+him, and, indeed, he seldom went anywhere that he
+did not carry it.</p>
+
+<p>“For there’s no telling when you may see something
+you want to shoot or that ought to be shot,”
+he used to say, “and it’s always the man without
+a gun who needs it most. So I’m taking no
+chances.”</p>
+
+<p>They sailed all that afternoon without meeting
+with a craft of any kind. Straight to the east they
+went, and when night began to settle down Washington
+got supper. It was decided to run slowly
+after dark until all hands were more familiar with
+the ship.</p>
+
+<p>Morning found the <em>Mermaid</em> about a hundred
+miles from the island where she had been launched.
+The night had been uneventful, except that Mark
+told Jack he heard some strange noise near his
+bunk several times. He was nearest the storeroom
+where spare parts, and the curious cylinder
+the professor had brought aboard, were kept.</p>
+
+<p>“I guess it was rats,” said Jack. “They are
+always in ships.”</p>
+
+<p>“Old wooden ships, yes,” admitted Mark.
+“But I’ll bet there’s not a rat aboard the <em>Mermaid</em>.”</p>
+
+<p>“Then you were dreaming,” said Jack, as if
+that settled it.</p>
+
+<p>Mark did not speak further of the noise, but
+he did considerable thinking. However, the next
+night there was no further disturbance.</p>
+
+<p>The fourth day out, when everything had
+passed off well, the engines doing their best, the
+professor decided to speed them up a bit, since
+he was satisfied they had “found” themselves as
+mechanics term it.</p>
+
+<p>“We’ll see how fast we can go through the
+water,” said Mr. Henderson, “and then I think
+we can safely turn our course south. We are well
+beyond the ordinary lines of travel now.”</p>
+
+<p>Having oiled the bearings well, and seen that
+everything was in place and properly adjusted,
+the professor and the boys took their places in
+the conning tower, while Washington, Tom and
+Bill remained in the engine room. Andy stayed
+on deck with his gun.</p>
+
+<p>“I might see a big fish, and we could vary our
+bill of fare,” he said with a laugh.</p>
+
+<p>“Here we go!” exclaimed the professor as he
+shifted the levers and turned some wheels and
+valves. “Now we’ll see how fast we can travel.”</p>
+
+<p>As he spoke the <em>Mermaid</em> responded to the
+added impulse of the compressed air and shot
+through the water at a terrific speed. The sudden
+increase in momentum almost threw the boys from
+their feet, and they would have fallen had they
+not grasped some projecting levers.</p>
+
+<p>“I guess that will do,” said the scientist. “I
+think we have speed enough for almost any emergency.
+I’ll let her run at this rate for a while,
+and then we’ll slack up.”</p>
+
+<p>Looking ahead, the boys could see the green
+waters parting in front of the bow of the <em>Mermaid</em>,
+as if to make room for her. Two huge
+waves were thrown upon either side.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly, dead ahead, there loomed up a big
+black object.</p>
+
+<p>“Look out you’ll hit the rock!” cried Mark
+to the professor, who was steering.</p>
+
+<p>With a turn of his wrist Mr. Henderson moved
+the wheel which controlled the tube. It was deflected
+and sent the boat to larboard.</p>
+
+<p>At that instant from the rock two small fountains
+of water rose in the air, falling back in a
+shower of spray through which the sun gleamed.</p>
+
+<p>“That’s not a rock! It’s a big whale!” cried
+Jack. “And we’re going to hit him!”</p>
+
+<p>The professor had miscalculated the speed of
+the craft, or else had not thrown her far enough
+to larboard, for, a second later, the <em>Mermaid</em> was
+almost upon the big leviathan.</p>
+
+<p>With a desperate twirling of the steering wheel
+the professor veered the craft as far as possible.
+But all he could do did not suffice, for the craft
+hit the whale a glancing blow on the side, and the
+ship careened as if she would turn turtle.</p>
+
+<p>At the same time there rang out from upon
+deck the sound of a rifle shot. Old Andy had
+taken a chance at the enormous creature of the
+deep.</p>
+
+<p>“Hurrah!” the boys heard him shout. “I
+give him one plumb in the eye! A fine shot!
+And we hit him besides with the boat. I guess
+he’s a goner!”</p>
+
+<p>“I’m afraid not,” muttered the professor.
+“That was a bad blow we struck him, but I think
+it will only ruffle his temper. We’ll have to look
+sharp now, boys.”</p>
+
+<p>By this time the ship had rushed past the whale,
+but the boys, looking through a window in the
+rear of the tower could see the huge body. Now
+the fountains of water which the whale spouted
+were tinged with red.</p>
+
+<p>“He’s bleeding!” exclaimed the professor.
+“I guess Andy hit him in a vital spot.”</p>
+
+<p>“But not vital enough!” cried Mark. “See!
+He’s coming after us!”</p>
+
+<p>And so it proved. The whale, angered, and,
+probably half crazed by the pain of the bullet
+and the blow, was coursing after the ship, coming
+on with the speed of an express train. Straight
+at the <em>Mermaid</em> he lunged his huge bulk.</p>
+
+<p>“We must escape him!” cried Mr. Henderson.
+“If he hits us he’ll send us to the bottom!”</p>
+
+<p>He had made ready to slow up the <em>Mermaid</em>
+to see if it had sustained any damage from the
+impact with the whale, but when he saw the monster
+coming after the boat he knew the only safety
+lay in flight.</p>
+
+<p>“Let us go up into the air and so escape him!”
+cried Jack, with sudden inspiration.</p>
+
+<p>For an instant neither Mark nor the professor
+grasped what Jack meant. Then, with an exclamation,
+the professor pulled forward the lever that
+generated the gas and set working the gravity
+neutralizer, which would enable the ship to rise.</p>
+
+<p>Faster through the water went the <em>Mermaid</em>,
+and faster after her came the whale. Above the
+hum of the engines was heard the hiss of the
+powerful gas. The ship trembled more violently.</p>
+
+<p>“We are rising!” exclaimed the professor, as
+he looked at a gage.</p>
+
+<p>The boys could feel the craft lifting from the
+waves which clung to her as if they hated to lose
+her. The boys knew the gas was beginning to
+operate.</p>
+
+<p>“If it is not too late!” whispered Mark, half
+to himself.</p>
+
+<p>For the monster of the seas was coming on,
+lashing the water to foam with his terrible flukes,
+and sending aloft a bloody spray. His speed was
+awful.</p>
+
+<p>Now he was but ten feet away from the fleeing
+craft—now but eight—now five! Ten seconds
+more and the big head, like the blunt stern of a
+battle ship, forced forward by the tons of blubber,
+flesh, bone and fat behind it would strike the
+<em>Mermaid</em> and crush it like an egg shell.</p>
+
+<p>Now if ever was the need for the <em>Flying Mermaid</em>
+to prove herself worthy of the name. Now,
+if ever, was the time for her to leave the watery
+element and take to the lighter one.</p>
+
+<p>And she did. With a last tremble, as if to free
+herself from the hold of the waves, the gallant
+craft soared up into the air, leaving the water,
+which dripped from her keel like a fountain’s
+spray, and shooting aloft like a bird, escaped her
+terrible enemy which passed under her, so close
+that the lower part of the <em>Flying Mermaid</em> scraped
+the whale’s back.</p>
+
+<p>“Saved!” exclaimed the professor.</p>
+
+<div class='c000'>
+<a href='images/illus-046f.jpg'><img src='images/illus-046.jpg' alt='' class='c010' /></a>
+<p class='c011'>THE LOWER PART OF THE FLYING MERMAID SCRAPED THE WHALE’S BACK.</p>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id='ch06' class='c008'>CHAPTER VI<br /><br />THE CYCLONE</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>It was only in the nick of time, for a second
+later and the big mammal of the ocean would have
+struck the ship and split it from stem to stern.</p>
+
+<p>Higher and higher into the air mounted the
+<em>Flying Mermaid</em>, while in the water below, the
+whale, incensed by missing his prey, was lashing
+the waves to foam.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, that was a narrow squeak; as close as
+I ever care to come to it!” exclaimed Andy as he
+let go of the steel rail to which he was clinging
+and entered the conning tower. “I had no idea
+of hitting the big fish.”</p>
+
+<p>“I guess he would have taken after us whether
+you had fired at him or not,” said Mr. Henderson.
+“He was probably looking for trouble, and took
+the first thing that came in his way, which happened
+to be us. Some whales are like that, so I
+have read; big bull creatures, exiled from the school
+to which they once belonged, they get like mad
+creatures and know neither friend nor foe. Something
+like rogue elephants, I imagine.”</p>
+
+<p>Now, having thus unexpectedly risen into the
+air, the professor decided to continue travel in
+that style for a while at least. It would require
+less force to propel the ship, and the going would
+be more comfortable, since in the upper regions
+the <em>Mermaid</em> rode on an even keel, while in the
+water there was more or less rolling, due to the
+action of the waves.</p>
+
+<p>Once recovered from their fright caused by the
+whale, and having lost sight of the enormous creature,
+for they were now far above the ocean, the
+adventurers began to think of something to eat.</p>
+
+<p>Washington lost little time in preparing a meal,
+and it was eaten with a relish. The electric cooking
+stove worked to perfection, for the colored
+man had learned how to use that aboard the <em>Porpoise</em>
+and <em>Monarch</em>, and could be depended on to
+turn out appetizing dishes.</p>
+
+<p>“What do you say to traveling through the air
+at night?” asked Mr. Henderson, as he arose
+from the table.</p>
+
+<p>“Suits me,” replied Mark. “There’s less
+danger than in the water, I think.”</p>
+
+<p>Bill, Tom and Washington arranged to stand
+the night watch, and, when the professor had examined
+the engines and given orders about keeping
+the ship on her course through the air, he retired
+to his bunk. Jack and Mark soon followed.</p>
+
+<p>It must have been about midnight when Mark
+was awakened by a movement that seemed to
+come from the storeroom next to where his sleeping
+place was located. At first he thought he had
+been dreaming, but, as he found he was wide
+awake, he knew it was no imagination that had
+affected him.</p>
+
+<p>“I certainly heard something,” he said to himself.
+“It sounded just as it did the other night.
+I wonder if I ought to investigate.”</p>
+
+<p>He thought over the matter carefully as he sat
+upright in his bunk in the darkness. True the
+noise might be a natural one, due to the vibration
+of the engine, or to some echo from the machinery.
+As Mark listened he heard it again.</p>
+
+<p>This time he realized it was the slow movement
+of some heavy body. He felt a cold shiver run
+over him and his hair evinced an uncomfortable
+tendency to stand upright. But he conquered his
+feelings and resolved to keep cool and see if he
+could discover what had awakened him.</p>
+
+<p>He got up and moved softly about the little
+room that contained his bunk. He could hear
+better now, and knew it was no echo or vibration
+that had come to his ears.</p>
+
+<p>Once again he heard the strange sound. It was
+exactly the same as before; as if some big creature
+was pulling itself over the floor.</p>
+
+<p>“Maybe it’s a snake; a water snake!” thought
+Mark. “It may have crawled aboard when we
+did not notice it.”</p>
+
+<p>Then he remembered that the ship had not been
+open in any way that would enable a serpent to
+come on it, since it had been started on its ocean
+trip. Before that, he was sure no snake had
+entered the <em>Flying Mermaid</em>. Still it sounded
+more like a snake than anything else.</p>
+
+<p>“I’m going to make a search,” decided the
+boy.</p>
+
+<p>He took a small portable electric light, run by
+a storage battery, and, slipping on a pair of shoes
+and a bath robe, he left his stateroom.</p>
+
+<p>He had decided that the noise came from the
+storage compartment and so made for that. The
+door he knew was not locked, since he had seen
+Mr. Henderson go in late that afternoon, and the
+professor had used no key.</p>
+
+<p>Moving softly, Mark left his room and soon
+found himself in a corridor, on either side of which
+were located the sleeping quarters of the others.
+He did not want to awaken them, and, perhaps,
+be laughed at for his curiosity.</p>
+
+<p>To get to the storeroom Mark had to go first
+from the corridor into the dining room. He soon
+reached the door that guarded what he thought
+might be a strange secret. Trying the knob softly
+he found it giving under his fingers.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder if I had better go in,” he thought.
+“Perhaps, after all, it was only rats, as Jack said.”</p>
+
+<p>But, even as he listened he again heard the odd
+sound coming from the room. This determined
+him. He would solve the mystery if possible.</p>
+
+<p>Cautiously he turned the knob. The door was
+slowly swinging open when Mark was startled by
+a noise from behind him. He turned suddenly
+to see Professor Henderson confronting him.</p>
+
+<p>“What is it, Mark? Is the ship on fire?
+What’s the matter? Is any one hurt?”</p>
+
+<p>“I was just going in this room to——” began Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Don’t do it! Don’t do it!” exclaimed the
+professor in an excited whisper. “No one must
+go in that room. I forgot to tell you and Jack
+about it. No one must enter. It contains a
+secret!”</p>
+
+<p>“I heard a strange noise and——” Mark began
+again.</p>
+
+<p>“It could make no noise! It would be impossible
+for it to make a noise!” the professor exclaimed.</p>
+
+<p>“I heard something,” the boy insisted.</p>
+
+<p>“You were dreaming!” said the professor.
+“Now go back to bed, Mark, and don’t let this
+happen again. Remember, no one must enter
+that room unless I give permission!”</p>
+
+<p>Somewhat crestfallen at the outcome of his
+investigations, but realizing that the professor
+could do what he wanted to aboard his own ship,
+Mark went back to bed. But he could not sleep.
+All the rest of the night he was wondering whether
+Mr. Henderson had some strange creature hidden
+aboard the <em>Mermaid</em>. He feared lest the old
+scientist’s mind might be affected and, in his wildness
+he had made some infernal machine that
+would, in time, blow the whole ship apart.</p>
+
+<p>But tired nature asserted itself at last, and,
+weary with vain imaginings, Mark fell into a
+slumber. The next morning he awoke with a
+start from a dream that he was being devoured
+by an immense water snake.</p>
+
+<p>He said nothing to the others about his night’s
+adventure, for, as it transpired, no one else had
+been awakened by his investigations. The professor
+did not refer to his conversation with Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“There’s something queer going on aboard the
+ship this trip,” said Mark to himself. “But I
+guess it’s none of my business. Professor Henderson
+seems to know what he is doing and I
+guess I can trust him.”</p>
+
+<p>He resolved to think no more of the strange
+noises and movements, and, for several nights
+thereafter he was not disturbed by them.</p>
+
+<p>The weather, which, up to this time had been
+fair, took a sudden turn for the worse about the
+fourth day after Mark’s little night expedition.
+One evening the sun sank in a mass of dull lead-colored
+clouds and a sharp wind sprang up.</p>
+
+<p>“We’re going to have a storm,” said Mr.
+Henderson. “It’s liable to be a bad one, too,
+from the way the barometer is falling.”</p>
+
+<p>He looked at the glass, and scanned the various
+instruments that told how high up the <em>Mermaid</em>
+was and how fast she was traveling.</p>
+
+<p>“We’re pretty high up in the air,” he said,
+“and scooting along at about fifty miles an hour.
+We are going against the wind, too, but fortunately
+it is not blowing hard.”</p>
+
+<p>At that moment there sounded from without a
+peculiar howling sound, as if a siren whistle was
+being blown.</p>
+
+<p>“'Pears like there’s goin’ t’ be a tumultuous
+demonstration of sub-maxiliary contortions in th’
+empherial regions contiguous t’ th’ upper atmosphere!”
+exclaimed Washington, entering from the
+engine room into the conning tower.</p>
+
+<p>“What’s the trouble?” asked Mr. Henderson.</p>
+
+<p>“Terrible big black cloud chasin’ us from behind!”
+exclaimed the colored man.</p>
+
+<p>Noting the alarm in Washington’s voice the professor
+glanced from the rear window. What he
+saw caused him to exclaim:</p>
+
+<p>“It’s a cyclone! We must drop down to avoid
+it!”</p>
+
+<p>He sprang to a lever controlling the gas and
+yanked it toward him. There was a shrill hissing
+sound, and a second later the <em>Mermaid</em> began to
+sink. The boys watching the gages on the wall
+of the tower, saw that the craft was falling rapidly.</p>
+
+<p>But, with a rush and roar, the terrible wind was
+upon them. It caught the craft in its fearful grip
+and heeled it over as a ship careens to the ocean
+blast.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s a storm in the upper regions! We’ll find
+it calm below!” cried the professor above the
+howling of the gale. He opened the gas outlet
+wider and the ship fell more rapidly.</p>
+
+<p>“Are you sure we’re over the ocean?” asked
+Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Positive!” the professor called back. “We
+have been traveling straight south over the Atlantic
+for the last week. We will land in the midst
+of the waters and float safely.”</p>
+
+<p>Lower and lower went the <em>Mermaid</em>. The
+wind was now blowing with the force of a tornado,
+and, as the craft had to slant in order to descend,
+it felt the power of the gale more than if it had
+scudded before it. But, by skilful use of the
+directing tube, the professor was able to keep
+the boat from turning over. As they came further
+down toward the earth the force of the wind was
+felt less and less, until, as they came within two
+hundred feet of the water which they saw below
+them in the gathering dusk, it died out altogether.</p>
+
+<p>“Now we are free from it,” said the professor
+as the <em>Mermaid</em> came down on the waves like an
+immense swan.</p>
+
+<p>“Are you going ahead or going to stop here?”
+asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“We’ll keep right on,” Mr. Henderson answered.
+“No telling when the storm may strike
+down here. We’ll go as far as we can to-night.”</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch07' class='c008'>CHAPTER VII<br /><br />A QUEER SAIL</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>Now that the fear and worriment was over
+they all began to feel hungry, and, while Mark
+and Jack took charge of the conning tower Washington
+got breakfast. The professor seemed preoccupied
+during the meal, and several times, when
+Mark spoke to him, he did not reply.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder if he is worried about something,
+or is thinking of something which seems to be concealed
+in the storeroom,” the boy thought.</p>
+
+<p>But, after a while, the professor seemed to be
+more like himself. He was busy over several
+maps and charts, and then announced the ship
+would try air-sailing again for a while.</p>
+
+<p>“We can make better time above than we can
+on the water,” he said, “and I am anxious to
+get to the mysterious island and learn what is in
+store for us.”</p>
+
+<p>Perhaps if the professor had been able to look
+ahead, and see what was soon going to happen,
+he would not have been so anxious for it to
+occur.</p>
+
+<p>It was shortly after dinner when, the gas container
+having been filled, the ship rose in the air,
+and began sailing over the ocean, about a mile
+up. The day was a fine one, and, as they were
+moving south, it was constantly growing warmer.
+Down on the water, in fact, it was quite hot, but
+in the air it was just right.</p>
+
+<p>Like some immense bird the <em>Mermaid</em> went
+flying through the air. The boys and the professor
+sat upon the deck in easy chairs. It was
+like being on the top of some tall “sky-scraper”
+building which, by some strange power, was being
+moved forward. Below them the ocean tumbled
+in long, lazy swells.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly Mark, who was looking through a
+telescope at the expanse of water stretched out
+under them, gave a cry.</p>
+
+<p>“There’s a ship! She’s on fire!”</p>
+
+<p>“Where?” asked the professor, stretching out
+his hand for the glass.</p>
+
+<p>“Just to the port of the forward tube. See
+the smoke!” exclaimed Mark.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Henderson looked. Through the lens he
+saw a column of black vapor rising skyward.
+Mingled with it were red flames.</p>
+
+<p>“Lower the <em>Mermaid</em>!” he cried. “We must
+save those on board if we can!”</p>
+
+<p>Mark ran to the conning tower, where
+Washington was, to give the order. The colored man,
+who was looking ahead, intent on guiding the
+ship, did not at first hear what Mark called.</p>
+
+<p>“Lower us! Send the <em>Mermaid</em> down!” Mark
+cried again.</p>
+
+<p>The sudden shout and the excited voice of
+Mark so startled Washington, that, fearing some
+accident had happened, he pulled the lever, controlling
+the gas supply, with more force than necessary.</p>
+
+<p>There was a loud explosion, followed by a
+crackling sound, a flash of light, and the <em>Mermaid</em>
+came to a sudden stop.</p>
+
+<p>“What’s the matter?” cried Mark, feeling that
+something was wrong.</p>
+
+<p>“I don’t know!” Washington replied, as he
+dashed toward the engine room.</p>
+
+<p>The <em>Mermaid</em>, her forward flight checked, hung
+in the air, suspended, neither rising or falling.</p>
+
+<p>“Why don’t we go on down?” the professor
+asked, hurrying to the tower.</p>
+
+<p>“There has been an explosion—an accident!”
+exclaimed Mark. “I guess we can’t go down!”</p>
+
+<p>“But we must!” Mr. Henderson insisted,
+seizing the lever which should have produced a
+downward motion. The handle swung to and fro.
+It was disconnected from the apparatus it operated.</p>
+
+<p>The ship was now stationary in the air, moving
+neither forward nor backward, neither rising nor
+falling. Washington had stopped the air pumps
+as soon as he learned something was wrong.</p>
+
+<p>When Mr. Henderson saw the useless lever,
+which had controlled the outlet of gas from the
+holder, he ran out on deck. One glance told him
+what had happened. One of the electric wires
+had become short-circuited,—that is, the insulation
+had worn off and allowed the current to
+escape. This had produced a spark, which had
+exploded the gas which was in the pipe leading
+from the generator up into the aluminum holder.
+Fortunately there was an automatic cut-off for the
+supply of vapor, or the whole tank would have
+gone up.</p>
+
+<p>As it was, only a small quantity had blown up,
+but this was enough to break the machinery at
+the point where the lever in the conning tower
+joined the pipe. If it had not been for the automatic
+cut-off all the gas in the holder would have
+poured out in a great volume, and the ship would
+have fallen like a shot.</p>
+
+<p>“Can we do nothing to save those on the burning
+vessel?” asked Mark, pointing to where a
+cloud of smoke hung over the ocean.</p>
+
+<p>“I fear not, now,” answered the professor.
+“We are in a bad plight ourselves.”</p>
+
+<p>“Are we in any danger?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“Not specially,” Mr. Henderson replied.
+“But we must find a means of lowering ourselves
+gradually.”</p>
+
+<p>“Then it will be too late to save any of those
+on the ship,” observed Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“I’m afraid so,” the scientist made reply.</p>
+
+<p>The <em>Mermaid</em> rested some distance above the
+surface of the waters. She moved slightly to and
+fro with the wind, and rocked gently. The professor
+was examining the broken machinery.</p>
+
+<p>“I have a plan!” suddenly cried Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“What is it?” asked Mr. Henderson.</p>
+
+<p>“Can’t we bore a hole in the tank, insert a
+small faucet or tap, and let the gas out that way
+gradually?” asked the boy. “When we get down
+we can rescue those in danger of fire, and, later,
+can repair the break.”</p>
+
+<p>“The very thing!” exclaimed Mr. Henderson.
+“I never thought of that! Here, Washington!
+Bring me a drill, and a small stop-cock!”</p>
+
+<p>The drill was obtained from the engine room.
+Working rapidly Mr. Henderson bored a hole
+in the lower part of the holder. As soon as the
+metal was penetrated the gas, which was under
+considerable pressure, rushed from the tank with
+a hissing sound. At once the <em>Mermaid</em> began to
+settle rapidly.</p>
+
+<p>But the professor was prepared for this. He
+thrust the end of the stop-cock into the hole. It
+was screwed fast and the valve turned. This
+stopped the flow of gas and checked the descent
+of the ship. Then, by opening the tap the vapor
+was allowed to escape gradually, bringing the <em>Flying
+Mermaid</em> gently to the water.</p>
+
+<p>As the adventurers approached they could see
+that the vessel was now a mass of flames. The
+wind was driving the fire toward the forecastle,
+and the crew had sought refuge aft. But this expedient
+could not last long, for, already the
+tongues of fire were licking the sides of the craft
+and coming nearer and nearer the seemingly
+doomed men. The vessel was a large one, and
+heavily laden.</p>
+
+<p>As those in peril caught sight of the <em>Mermaid</em>
+settling down into the water, apparently from the
+clouds, their fears gave place to astonishment.
+So great was this that they ceased their cries of
+terror. Then, as they saw that the strange craft
+navigated the ocean, for the engines were started
+aboard the <em>Mermaid</em>, they began to call for help.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch08' class='c008'>CHAPTER VIII<br /><br />THE FLYING MERMAID DISABLED</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>“We’ll save you!” shouted Mr. Henderson,
+who was on the deck, while Mark was steering the
+craft. “Hold on a few minutes longer and we’ll
+be alongside!”</p>
+
+<p>“They’re real! They’re real!” some of those
+aboard the burning ship could be heard to shout.
+Evidently more than one of them had taken the
+<em>Mermaid</em> for a delusion of their fear-crazed brain.</p>
+
+<p>“They are real persons!” they called again
+and again. “They are coming to save us!”</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Henderson ran his ship as near the burning
+craft as he dared. Then he called to the crew
+to leap into the water and swim to him. He, with
+Washington, Jack, Bill and Tom, stood ready to
+haul aboard any who were too weak to help themselves.</p>
+
+<p>In a few minutes all of those left alive on the
+sailing vessel—fourteen in all—had come safely
+aboard the <em>Mermaid</em>. The ship was now completely
+enveloped in flames.</p>
+
+<p>“Are there any more left on her?” asked Mr.
+Henderson of one who appeared to be a mate of
+the burning craft.</p>
+
+<p>“Not a soul!” was the answer. “The captain
+and ten men perished in the flames. The fire
+broke out a week ago in the lower hold. We
+fought it as well as we could but it got the best
+of us. Then it suddenly broke through the decks,
+almost like an explosion, a little while ago, and
+the captain and others were lost, and so were our
+small boats. We managed to get aft but were
+about to give up when you appeared.”</p>
+
+<p>“What ship is it and where are you from?”</p>
+
+<p>“The <em>Good Hope</em>, laden with logwood, hides,
+jute and other materials from South America,”
+the mate answered. “We were bound for New
+York.”</p>
+
+<p>“It is more like the <em>Last Hope</em> instead of the
+<em>Good Hope</em>,” observed Mr. Henderson in a quiet
+voice, as he saw the flames mount higher and
+higher over the ship. A few seconds later the
+craft seemed rent by an internal explosion. It
+appeared to break in two parts, and, amid a
+shower of sparks and a cloud of black smoke, the
+vessel sank under the water and was seen no more.</p>
+
+<p>The rescued men turned to behold the final
+end of their ship. They betrayed no particular
+emotion, and some of them even laughed, which
+the professor thought, at the time, was rather
+strange. But there was little opportunity for speculation.
+The men were in a sad plight. Few of
+them had more than the clothes they stood in,
+though each one wore about his waist a belt, and
+all of them seemed to guard the leather circlets
+jealously.</p>
+
+<p>The professor and his crew were soon busy supplying
+remedies for burns, since several of the
+men were seared by the flames. Then, as it was
+learned they had eaten nothing for many hours,
+it having been impossible to use the galley, a meal
+was prepared and the survivors of the wreck were
+well fed.</p>
+
+<p>The hunger of the newcomers having been
+appeased, they showed much curiosity over the
+strange craft that had so opportunely come to their
+rescue. Most of the sailors were ignorant men,
+and the professor had little fear of them learning
+anything concerning his secrets. He explained
+briefly about the <em>Mermaid</em>, but said nothing of
+whither she was bound.</p>
+
+<p>The addition of fourteen men to the rather
+small accommodations of the <em>Mermaid</em> was a serious
+matter to consider. The ship was able to hold
+them all, and even to sail through the air with
+them, since Mr. Henderson had provided an excess
+of power. But it was going to be a problem
+to feed so many, and still save enough provisions
+for the long voyage which lay ahead.</p>
+
+<p>However, Mr. Henderson felt his first duty to
+be toward his fellowmen, even if his voyage must
+be delayed, or given up for a time, while he got
+more provisions. There would be no sleeping
+quarters for the sailors, but when this was explained
+to them they cheerfully said they would
+sleep on deck if necessary. In fact some of them
+had to, but as the weather was warm and clear
+this was no hardship. A few found quarters in
+the engine room and other apartments of the <em>Mermaid</em>.</p>
+
+<p>Finding, after an examination, that his ship was
+in good order save for the broken gas apparatus,
+Mr. Henderson gave orders to proceed along the
+surface of the ocean. The sailors wanted to see
+how it felt to mount into the air, but Mr. Henderson,
+refused to attempt a flight until he had
+made complete repairs, and this would take a day
+or more.</p>
+
+<p>At this there appeared to be some discontent
+among the survivors, and they muttered to each
+other as they stood in a group on deck. But the
+professor and his assistants were too busy with
+their preparations for fixing the break to notice this.</p>
+
+<p>While the men were gathered in a knot near the
+after part of the small deck, the mate separated
+from them, and, coming close to where Mark was
+standing, unscrewing some of the broken parts
+of the pipe said, in a low voice.</p>
+
+<p>“Tell the captain to watch out.”</p>
+
+<p>“What do you mean?” asked Mark quickly.</p>
+
+<p>“Hush! Not so loud!” the mate exclaimed.
+“If the men hear me talking to you, or see me,
+they may kill me. Tell the captain to look out;
+that’s all. Be on guard, and watch the engine
+room carefully.”</p>
+
+<p>“But why—?” Mark began, when, turning
+suddenly, the mate left him. It was well he did
+so, for, at that instant, one of the sailors, who
+had observed the two conversing, strolled in their
+direction.</p>
+
+<p>Much alarmed, Mark sought Mr. Henderson
+and told him what he had heard.</p>
+
+<p>“I suppose the fire may have turned the poor
+man’s head,” the scientist said. “I wonder if he
+thinks the men I rescued would mutiny and take
+possession of my ship? If they did they would
+not know how to work it, so what good would it
+do?”</p>
+
+<p>“Hadn’t we better look out?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“I’m not afraid,” replied the professor. “I
+will be too busy the next few days, repairing the
+break, to think of anything else. Besides, what
+would they want to harm us for? Didn’t we save
+their lives?”</p>
+
+<p>Seeing the scientist placed no faith in what the
+mate had said, Mark went back to his task.</p>
+
+<p>It soon became too dark to work, and it was
+decided, after supper, to halt the ship until morning
+as it would be less risky.</p>
+
+<p>Mark did not sleep well, his dreams being disturbed
+by visions of pirates and black flags. But
+morning came and nothing had developed. The
+men seemed to recover their spirits with daybreak,
+and most of the crew, after breakfast, greeted
+Mr. Henderson pleasantly, and asked to be allowed
+to help fix the ship.</p>
+
+<p>It took the skilled labor of the professor, Washington
+and the boys to mend the break, and, even
+at that, it was four days in the repairing. But
+at last the final bolt was in place, and the <em>Mermaid</em>
+was able to resume her trips through the air.</p>
+
+<p>“We will rise the first thing in the morning,”
+said the professor to Mark and Jack that night.
+“I am anxious to see how the ship behaves with a
+big load aboard.”</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch09' class='c008'>CHAPTER IX<br /><br />THE MUTINY</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>Mark was awakened that night by feeling some
+one trying to turn him over. At first he thought
+it was Jack, and sleepily muttered that he wanted
+to be let alone.</p>
+
+<p>“Sorry I can’t oblige ye, my hearty!” exclaimed
+a rough voice in his ear, “but I got particular
+orders t’ tie you up!”</p>
+
+<p>At that Mark tried to sit up, but he found he
+could not. He discovered that he was closely
+bound with many turns of a rope, while in front
+of his bunk stood one of the rescued sailors.</p>
+
+<p>“There,” said the man, with a final tightening
+of the ropes. “I guess you’re safe.”</p>
+
+<p>“What’s the matter? What does it all
+mean?” asked Mark, much bewildered.</p>
+
+<p>“It means that we have possession of the ship,”
+the sailor answered, “and, if you’re wise you’ll
+not make a fuss. It wouldn’t do any good, anyhow,
+as all your friends are in the same condition.”</p>
+
+<p>Then, picking Mark up, as if he was a baby,
+the man slung him over his shoulder and carried
+him to the living room. There Mark saw Jack,
+the professor, Washington, and the others similarly
+bound.</p>
+
+<p>“Do you realize what you are doing?” asked
+the professor angrily of his captors. “You are
+mutinying, and are liable to severe punishment.”</p>
+
+<p>“If they ever get us,” added one of the men.
+“We’ve got the ship now, and we mean to keep
+her. You’ll have to run her or show us how.”</p>
+
+<p>“Never!” cried the professor.</p>
+
+<p>“I guess he will when he feels this,” said one
+of the men, as he dragged from a recess two wires.
+“I happen to know something of electricity, and
+when he feels these perhaps he’ll change his mind.
+I’ll start the dynamo.”</p>
+
+<p>The sailor showed that he was acquainted with
+machinery, for soon the hum of the electric apparatus
+was heard.</p>
+
+<p>“Now to make him tell!” the man with the
+wires exclaimed, advancing toward the professor,
+who turned pale.</p>
+
+<p>“Stop! You must not torture the old man!”
+cried a voice, and the mate of the <em>Good Hope</em>
+stepped in front of the sailor with the electrified
+wires.</p>
+
+<p>“Who’s going to stop me?” asked the man.</p>
+
+<p>“I will. It’s not necessary,” the mate went
+on quickly. “If we make him weak we may kill
+him, and he can not tell us what we want to know.
+One of the boys can tell us how to run the ship.”</p>
+
+<p>The mate came quickly over to where Mark
+lay, and whispered:</p>
+
+<p>“Consent to tell. It is the only way of saving
+his life. Tell ’em how to raise the craft. Then
+leave all to me. I will save you all and the ship,
+too, if I can. But consent.”</p>
+
+<p>Mark nodded his head, and the mate cried:</p>
+
+<p>“I knew I could fetch ’em. I have hypnotic
+power. This boy will raise the ship for us.
+Loosen his bonds, some of you.”</p>
+
+<p>Satisfied that they were now on the way to experiencing
+a new sensation, the sailors took the
+ropes off Mark’s arms and legs, and he was allowed
+to rise. With a reassuring nod toward the
+professor he led the way to the engine room, followed
+by half the men. He resolved to start
+the gas machine slowly, so as to make the upward
+trip last longer, thinking before it had gone far,
+some way of escape from the mutineers might be
+found.</p>
+
+<p>While a crowd of the sailors stood near him,
+Mark operated the machinery in the engine room
+that started the gas generating, and set the negative
+gravity apparatus working.</p>
+
+<p>“You’d better not try any tricks on us,” said
+one of the men in an ugly tone of voice.</p>
+
+<p>“I’m not going to,” replied Mark. “If you
+go out on deck you will soon see the ship leaving
+the water and mounting into the air.”</p>
+
+<p>“Some of you go,” ordered a man with a big
+bushy red beard. “See if the ship rises. When
+she begins to go up sing out. I’m going to stay
+here and see how the young cub does it so I can
+work it myself.”</p>
+
+<p>Obeying the red-bearded man, who seemed to
+be a leader, several of the sailors went out on the
+deck. It was quite dark, but there was a phosphorous
+glow to the water which made the rolling
+waves visible.</p>
+
+<p>The gas was being generated, as could be told
+by the hissing sound. Mark watched the machinery
+anxiously, for he knew much depended on
+him, and the professor was not at hand to guide
+and instruct him. He watched the dial of the
+gage which registered the gas pressure and saw
+it slowly moving. In a little while it would be at
+the point at which the ship ought to rise.</p>
+
+<p>Presently a quiver seemed to run through the
+<em>Mermaid</em>. Now a shout came from the watchers
+on deck.</p>
+
+<p>“She’s going up!”</p>
+
+<p>The ship was indeed rising. The red-bearded
+man, who was addressed as Tony, ran from the
+engine room to the deck. He saw that the ship
+was now ten feet above the water. Back he came
+to where Mark stood by the gas machine.</p>
+
+<p>“Lucky for you that you didn’t fool us, lad,”
+he said with a leer. “See that you mind me
+hereafter. Now show me how the shebang
+works.”</p>
+
+<p>When the ship had risen as far as Tony desired
+he made Mark send it straight ahead. The boy
+adjusted the air tube to carry the craft toward
+the south, but Tony, seeing by a compass in which
+direction they were headed, ordered Mark to steer
+due east.</p>
+
+<p>“Fix things so they will stay so, too,” added
+Tony. “I don’t want to stop until I get a thousand
+miles away. Then we’ll come down, sail to
+some sunny island, and enjoy life.”</p>
+
+<p>Mark locked the steering apparatus so as to
+keep the <em>Mermaid</em> headed due east.</p>
+
+<p>“Now you can go back to your friends,” Tony
+said. “When I want you I’ll send for you.”</p>
+
+<p>With a heavy heart Mark rejoined the professor
+and others. He found them with their bonds removed.
+But to guard against their escape several
+men were on watch outside the door.</p>
+
+<p>“What are they doing?” asked the professor
+eagerly as Mark entered, and the boy told him
+what had taken place.</p>
+
+<p>“They will ruin my ship and spoil the whole
+trip,” cried the old scientist. “Oh, why did I
+ever go to the rescue of the scoundrels?”</p>
+
+<p>“Never mind,” said Jack. “Perhaps we may
+yet outwit them.”</p>
+
+<p>Morning came at last. The ship was still shooting
+forward at fast speed, in an easterly direction.
+The sailors had learned, in their short stay aboard,
+where the food and stores were kept, and they lost
+little time in getting breakfast. They sent some
+in to their captives, including a big pot of hot
+coffee, and, after partaking of this the professor
+and his friends felt better.</p>
+
+<p>The mate of the <em>Good Hope</em> came in to help
+clear away the dishes. As he passed Mark he
+slipped into the boy’s hand a note.</p>
+
+<p>“Don’t read it until you are alone,” he said
+in a low voice, as he hurried from the room.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the other sailors had left, Mark
+glanced at the slip of paper. It bore these words:</p>
+
+<p>“Open when you hear three raps, then two,
+then three, and keep silent.”</p>
+
+<p>“What is it?” asked Mr. Henderson.</p>
+
+<p>Mark showed him the paper.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder what it means,” the boy said.</p>
+
+<p>“Do you think he is a friend of ours?” the
+professor asked.</p>
+
+<p>Mark told him of the mate’s conversation the
+night previous.</p>
+
+<p>“I think we can trust him,” the scientist went
+on. “He must intend to pay us a visit when the
+others are asleep. When we hear the knocks as
+he specifies we must open the door and let him in.”</p>
+
+<p>All that day the captives were kept in the living
+room. Once or twice Mark was sent for to make
+some adjustment to the machinery, but the apparatus,
+for the most part, was automatic, and needed
+little attention. The professor, as well as the
+others, were all impatience for the promised visit
+of the mate. Still they felt he would not come
+until night.</p>
+
+<p>In fact it was long past midnight before Mark,
+Jack and the professor, who were anxiously listening,
+heard the three raps, then two, then three
+more. Mark quickly opened the door, and the
+mate stepped inside, holding his finger to his lips
+as a sign of caution. Old Andy, Washington,
+Bill and Tom had fallen asleep.</p>
+
+<p>“I have only time for a few words,” the mate
+said. “I am closely watched. Tony mistrusts
+me. I will save you if I can.”</p>
+
+<p>“Why have they repaid my kindness with such
+actions?” asked Mr. Henderson.</p>
+
+<p>“Because they are desperate men,” replied the
+mate. “They are nothing more than pirates.
+They mutinied on the other ship, killed the captain
+and those of the crew who would not join them,
+and started off to seek their fortunes. I pretended
+to join them to save my life, but I have only been
+watching for a chance to escape.</p>
+
+<p>“Because of lax discipline the ship was sent on
+fire. We tried to put it out but could not. The
+rest you know.</p>
+
+<p>“I heard them plan to capture this airship,
+but could do nothing to stop them. Then I resolved
+to pretend to act with them. They fear
+pursuit for their other mutiny, and are anxious to
+get as far away as possible.”</p>
+
+<p>“Do you think they will abandon the ship in
+a little while?” asked the professor hopefully.</p>
+
+<p>“I’m afraid not,” answered the mate. “I
+think they want to get rid of all of you, so they can
+sail about as they please. Tony is a smart man.
+He could soon learn to run this ship, he thinks.”</p>
+
+<p>“I doubt it,” Mr. Henderson answered. “But
+how are you going to help us?”</p>
+
+<p>“I have not fully made up my plans,” the mate
+answered. “However I wanted you to know I
+would do my best to save you. Now I must go.
+Be on the watch and when I can I will let you
+know what I have decided on. I will hand Mark
+a note when I bring your meals, just as I did to-day.
+I think——”</p>
+
+<p>“Hark! What was that?” asked the professor.</p>
+
+<p>There was a noise outside the door, as if some
+one was listening.</p>
+
+<p>“Put out the lights!” whispered the mate, and
+Jack switched off the electric incandescents.</p>
+
+<p>A knock sounded on the door and the voice of
+Tony called:</p>
+
+<p>“Mark! Come here! I want you to look at
+the gas machine. It has stopped working, and we
+are falling!”</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch10' class='c008'>CHAPTER X<br /><br />FOOLING THEIR ENEMIES</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>Mark hurried into the corridor, taking care to
+close the door after him, so Tony could get no
+glimpse of the mate who had risked so much to
+save his friends. But he need not have been
+alarmed for the leader of the mutineers was too excited
+over the stopping of the gas apparatus to give
+any heed to who was in with the captives.</p>
+
+<p>“Do you think you can fix it?” he asked the
+boy.</p>
+
+<p>“I guess so,” Mark replied confidently. “If
+I can’t there is no danger, for we will fall gradually
+and land in the water.”</p>
+
+<p>“But I don’t want to do that,” Tony objected.
+“I want to keep on through the air.”</p>
+
+<p>Mark did not reply. By this time he was at
+the gas machine. He soon saw nothing was the
+matter save that new material must be placed in
+the retort where the vapor was generated. He
+refilled it, the gas was manufactured once more,
+and the ship began to rise.</p>
+
+<p>“I will know how to do it next time,” Tony
+said with a grin. Mark realized that every time
+he showed the leader of the mutineers something
+about the ship it was putting the professor and his
+friends more and more into the power of the
+scoundrels. But there was no help for it.</p>
+
+<p>The ship was still plunging ahead, and kept
+about a mile above the earth. As there was no
+further need of Mark, he was told he could go
+back to his friends. When he reached the room
+where they were held prisoners, he found the mate
+had gone away, promising again to do all he
+could for them.</p>
+
+<p>The next night, which it seemed would never
+come, for the day, locked as the captives were in
+their room, seemed endless, finally closed in.
+Mark, Jack and the professor were anxious to
+know whether the mate would pay them another
+visit. As for Andy, Tom and Bill, while they
+were interested in the ship, and wanted to be free
+from the power of the mutineers, they did not lose
+any sleep over it.</p>
+
+<p>Shortly after midnight, there came again the
+peculiar knock, and the mate entered the room.
+He seemed much excited over something, and, as
+soon as the portal was securely closed he said to
+Professor Henderson:</p>
+
+<p>“Is there an island any where near here where
+men could live for a time?”</p>
+
+<p>“What do you mean?” asked the scientist.
+“Do you want us to desert the ship and leave these
+scoundrels in charge?”</p>
+
+<p>“Nothing of the sort,” replied the mate, who,
+had said his name was Jack Rodgers. “But first
+answer my question. A great deal may depend on
+it.”</p>
+
+<p>Seeing Rodgers was in earnest, the professor
+looked over some maps and charts, and announced
+that they were within a few hundred miles of a
+group of islands.</p>
+
+<p>“When would we reach them?” was Rodgers’
+next question.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Henderson made a few rapid calculations
+on a piece of paper.</p>
+
+<p>“At the present rate of sailing,” he said, “we
+should be there about ten o’clock to-morrow.
+That is, provided the ship does not slacken speed
+or increase it.”</p>
+
+<p>“There is no danger of either of those two
+things happening,” said the mate. “Tony is too
+afraid of the machinery to do anything to it. So
+you may safely figure that our speed will continue
+the same.”</p>
+
+<p>“Then I can guarantee, with all reasonable certainty,”
+the professor said, “that about ten o’clock
+to-morrow we will be less than a mile from the islands.
+They are a group where friendly natives
+live, and where many tropical fruits abound. One
+could scarcely select a better place to be shipwrecked.
+But I hope the plans of Tony and his
+friends do not include landing us there.”</p>
+
+<p>“No, nothing like that,” the mate answered.
+“Quite the contrary. But I had better be going.
+I will try and see Mark some time to-morrow.
+Tony does not mind when I speak to him.”</p>
+
+<p>With this Rodgers left the captives, as he heard
+some of the sailors moving about and did not want
+to be discovered. The professor and the boys wondered
+what the mate’s plan might be, but they had
+to be content to wait and see.</p>
+
+<p>The night passed without incident. About
+nine o’clock the next morning the mate came
+to the door of the room where the professor and
+his friends were prisoners. He made no secret
+of his approach, but knocked boldly.</p>
+
+<p>“Tell Mark I want to see him,” he said, as the
+professor answered. “All of you keep quiet,” he
+added in a whisper. “There may be good news
+soon.”</p>
+
+<p>Mark slipped from the room. He followed
+the mate to the upper deck which, at that time was
+deserted as all the sailors were in the dining room
+eating, which practice they indulged in as often
+as they could.</p>
+
+<p>“I have a plan to get rid of these rough men,”
+the mate said to Mark. “It may work, and,
+again it may not. At any rate it is worth trying.
+It all depends on you with what help I can give
+you.”</p>
+
+<p>“I’m willing to do my share,” Mark said, and
+for the next ten minutes the boy and the mate
+were in earnest conversation.</p>
+
+<p>It was about thirty-five minutes later when
+there arose a sudden commotion in the ship.
+Mark had returned to his friends and the mate
+had disappeared. The confusion seemed to come
+from the engine room where Tony had posted some
+of his men.</p>
+
+<p>“We’re falling down! We’ll all be killed!”
+shouted the men. “The ship is falling into the
+sea!”</p>
+
+<p>“What is the trouble?” asked the professor as
+he heard the commotion.</p>
+
+<p>“It is part of the mate’s plan,” said Mark.
+“He told me to tell you to do nothing. If Tony
+or any of the other men come to you just refer
+them to me.”</p>
+
+<p>Two minutes later Tony came rushing into the
+apartment where the captives were held prisoners.</p>
+
+<p>“Here! Come quickly, Mark!” he exclaimed.
+“Something has gone wrong with the gas machine
+again, and you must come and fix it before we are
+all dashed to pieces!”</p>
+
+<p>With every appearance of haste Mark rushed
+from the apartment, following Tony. The latter
+led the way to the engine room.</p>
+
+<p>“Can anything be done?” he asked.</p>
+
+<p>Mark took a survey of the machinery.</p>
+
+<p>“It is too late,” he said as though much excited.
+“The ship is falling down toward the sea
+with terrific force.”</p>
+
+<p>It needed but a glance at the height gage to
+show this. The pointer was revolving rapidly
+about the face of the dial.</p>
+
+<p>“Will the ship stand the blow?” asked Tony.</p>
+
+<p>“Not at the rate it is falling,” replied Mark.
+“She will go all to pieces when she strikes the
+water, and she may explode!”</p>
+
+<p>“What are we to do then?” asked the leader of
+the mutineers.</p>
+
+<p>“We must save ourselves!” cried the mate,
+running in at this juncture. “Let our prisoners
+shift for themselves as best they can. Let’s all
+leap into the sea. There we at least have a chance
+for our lives. But if we stay on this ship we will
+all be drowned like cats in a bag.”</p>
+
+<p>“What do you propose?” asked Tony, his face
+white with fear.</p>
+
+<p>“When the ship comes near enough the surface
+of the water to make it safe we should all drop
+overboard!” the mate exclaimed. “We are near
+some islands, I understand, and we can thus save
+our lives by swimming ashore.”</p>
+
+<p>This plan seemed to meet with instant favor,
+and a little later there was a rush for the deck, as
+each one wished to be the first to escape from the
+boat they believed to be doomed.</p>
+
+<p>Lower and lower fell the <em>Mermaid</em>. She was
+like a wounded bird which the shot of the hunter
+has crippled. Down and down she fluttered.</p>
+
+<p>By this time all the sailors, save the mate were
+on deck. He and Mark remained in the engine
+room.</p>
+
+<p>“Don’t let her get too low,” the mate whispered.</p>
+
+<p>“I’ll watch out,” Mark replied. “I want to
+give them a good scare while I’m at it.”</p>
+
+<p>The ship was now within fifty feet of the water.
+There was a cry of terror from the sailors. Some
+of them leaped over the rail and started to swim
+ashore, as the ship was by this time close to a
+group of islands.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly, from the engine room the mate rushed.</p>
+
+<p>“Jump! Jump for your lives!” he exclaimed.
+“The ship is about to blow up!”</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch11' class='c008'>CHAPTER XI<br /><br />MYSTERIOUS HAPPENINGS</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>The voice of the mate echoed through the <em>Mermaid</em>.
+Those on deck heard it, as did Tony in
+the engine room, where he was vainly trying to
+understand the complicated machinery.</p>
+
+<p>An instant later there sounded from beneath the
+ship a series of splashes. More sailors were leaping
+from the deck of the craft to the ocean. The
+distance was not great, particularly as they all
+landed in water.</p>
+
+<p>“Quick!” cried the mate to a group of sailors
+that hesitated before taking the jump. “The ship
+may blow up any minute now.”</p>
+
+<p>The men needed no second urging. As soon
+as they struck the water they began to swim ashore,
+as it was not far away. One after another they
+jumped over the rail. Tony was the last to go.
+He urged the captives to follow him, but they all
+refused.</p>
+
+<p>A minute later the only one of the pirate crew
+left on the ship was the mate. The others were all
+struggling in the sea. Eventually they all reached
+shore in safety.</p>
+
+<p>The airship was now within about twenty feet
+of the water. It was still falling but not so rapidly.</p>
+
+<p>“Better send her up, now,” said the mate to
+Mark, and the boy turned the necessary levers to
+accomplish this.</p>
+
+<p>Dipping into the water as a sea gull does when
+searching for food on the wing, for she had come
+quite low, the <em>Mermaid</em> mounted once more into
+the air, and was soon sailing along over the heads
+of Tony and his gang.</p>
+
+<p>“What’s it all about?” asked Mr. Henderson,
+who seemed in a sort of stupor. “I thought the
+ship was broken. How, then, can it rise?”</p>
+
+<p>“It was only a trick of mine,” Rodgers said.
+“The gas machine is not broken. I had Mark fix
+it so that only a little vapor would be generated.
+When the supply in the holder was not enough,
+and no more was being made, the ship had to
+sink. Mark and I pretended it was worse than it
+really was just to scare the scoundrels.”</p>
+
+<p>“And you evidently succeeded,” observed Mr.
+Henderson. “They have all left us. I am glad
+you stayed.”</p>
+
+<p>“So am I,” said Rodgers. “I was just waiting
+for a chance to escape from that crowd. This
+was the plan I thought of that night. I wanted to
+see the men put on some island where they could
+manage to live, and which was not too far away.”</p>
+
+<p>The <em>Mermaid</em> was now mounting upward rapidly,
+as Mark had adjusted the machinery properly.
+The craft was well rid of the pirate crew,
+and was able to proceed on its way, and enable
+Mr. Henderson to carry out his plans.</p>
+
+<p>When the <em>Mermaid</em> had reached a certain
+height her prow was turned the other way, and
+she was sent back racing over the ground she had
+just covered. But now the ship was in the hands
+of friends. Fortunately no great damage had
+been done by the sailors, and the professor was soon
+able to get things in ship-shape. The engines
+had not been molested and were working better
+than ever.</p>
+
+<p>“Now to make another attempt to reach the
+big hole in the earth,” the professor cried. “We
+will be careful next time, who we rescue from ships
+at sea.”</p>
+
+<p>The island was soon left behind, becoming a
+mere speck on the ocean. Those aboard the <em>Mermaid</em>
+knew no harm could befall the sailors, as
+there were no savage tribes on the little spot of
+land. Eventually the sailors were picked up by a
+passing vessel and taken to their homes. The
+story of their first mutiny leaked out and they were
+properly punished.</p>
+
+<p>It required several days travel before the airship
+regained the distance she had lost because of
+the plans of the pirates. Also, there were a number
+of minor repairs to make, and the professor
+and his friends were kept busy.</p>
+
+<p>“How much longer before we come to the big
+hole?” asked Jack, one day.</p>
+
+<p>“I think we ought to be near it in about two
+weeks,” the professor replied. “I only hope we
+shall not be disappointed, and will be able to explore
+it.”</p>
+
+<p>“'Tain’t goin’ t’ be no fun t’ be decimated an’
+expurgitated inter a conglomerous aggregation of
+elements constituting th’ exterior portion of human
+anatomy,” said Washington in dubious tones.</p>
+
+<p>“You mean you’re afraid of being boiled in the
+steam from the big hole?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Jest so,” replied the colored man.</p>
+
+<p>“You don’t need to worry about that,” put in
+the professor. “I will not take the ship down if
+there is any danger, though of course there will
+be some risk.”</p>
+
+<p>The ship, having been fully repaired, was now
+able to be speeded up, and was sent scudding along
+toward her destination. Rodgers proved a valuable
+acquisition toward the crew, for he had sailed
+many years in the waters over which they were
+flying, and was able to give the professor many
+valuable hints. He had heard vague stories of the
+island with the big hole, but had never been near
+it. He did not make the trip however, as, at his
+request, he was put off at an inhabited island one
+night.</p>
+
+<p>It was about a week after the sailors were frightened
+from the ship, that a curious experience befell
+Mark. Washington was on duty in the conning
+tower, attending to the apparatus as the ship flew
+through the air, and all the others had gone to
+bed. Mark had remained up, later than the
+others as he was interested in reading a book on
+science.</p>
+
+<p>About ten o’clock he became hungry, and going
+to the pantry got some bread and cold meat. He
+set these on a table, and then, remembering he
+would need some water to drink, started after some
+in the cooler, which was in a little room near the
+tower.</p>
+
+<p>Washington heard the boy as he turned the faucet
+to draw the liquid, and spoke to him, as the
+colored man was rather lonesome at his post.
+Mark did not linger more than a minute or two,
+but when he returned to where he had left the food
+he was much surprised.</p>
+
+<p>There was not a trace of it to be seen. The
+dishes were on the table, but every vestige of
+bread and meat had disappeared.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder if a cat or dog has been here,” was
+Mark’s first thought. Then he remembered that
+no such animals were aboard the <em>Mermaid</em>.</p>
+
+<p>Something on the floor caught his eye. He
+stooped and picked it up. It was a slice of bread,
+but in such shape that the boy stared at it, puzzled
+as to how it could have become so.</p>
+
+<p>It was flattened out quite thin, but the strangest
+part of it was that it bore what seemed to be the
+marks of thumb and fingers from a very large
+hand. So big, in fact, was the print, that Mark’s
+hand scarce covered half of it, and, where the
+bread had been squeezed into a putty like mass
+(for it was quite fresh) the peculiar markings on
+the skin of the tips of the fingers were visible.</p>
+
+<p>“It looks as if a giant grabbed this slice of
+bread,” Mark observed. “There are strange happenings
+aboard this ship. I wish I knew what they
+meant.”</p>
+
+<p>He looked all around for the food, thinking
+perhaps a rat had dragged it off, but there was
+no trace of it.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly the boy thought he heard a sound from
+the big storeroom. He was almost sure he heard
+something moving in there. He started toward
+the door when he was stopped by hearing the professor’s
+voice call:</p>
+
+<p>“Don’t open that door, Mark. Have I not
+told you that place must not be entered?”</p>
+
+<p>“I thought I heard some one in there,” Mark
+replied.</p>
+
+<p>“There is nothing in there but some apparatus
+of mine,” Mr. Henderson said. “I want no one
+to see it. What is the matter?”</p>
+
+<p>Mark explained matters to the scientist, who
+had, as he said later, arisen on hearing the boy
+moving about.</p>
+
+<p>“Oh, it was a rat that took your stuff,” Mr.
+Henderson said. “I guess there are some pretty
+big ones on the ship. Get some more food and
+go to sleep.”</p>
+
+<p>Mark felt it best to obey, though he was by no
+means satisfied with the professor’s explanation.
+He listened intently to see if any more noises came
+from the storeroom, but none did, and he went to
+bed.</p>
+
+<p>Several times after that Mark tried the experiment
+of leaving food about. On each occasion it
+was taken.</p>
+
+<p>“It looks as if the ship was haunted,” he said.
+“Of course I know it isn’t, but it’s very queer.
+They must be strange rats that can get food from
+shelves when there is only the smooth side of the
+ship to climb up,” for on some occasions Mark
+had tried the experiment of putting the food as
+nearly out of reach as possible.</p>
+
+<p>It took several nights to learn all this, and,
+as he did not want to take any one into his confidence,
+he had to work in secret. But, with all his
+efforts he learned nothing, save that there was
+something odd about the ship that he could not
+fathom.</p>
+
+<p>At first he believed the professor had some
+strange animal concealed in the storeroom, but he
+dismissed this idea almost as soon as he thought
+of it. For what could the scientist want with an
+animal when they were going to the interior of the
+earth? That some beast had slipped aboard was
+out of the question. Mark was much puzzled, but
+finally, deciding the matter did not concern him a
+great deal, gave up trying to solve the mystery,
+at least for a time.</p>
+
+<p>The ship was now in the neighborhood of the
+equator and the climate had become much warmer.
+So hot indeed were some nights that they slept out
+on deck, with the <em>Mermaid</em> flying through the air
+at a moderate pace, for it was deemed best not to
+go at any great speed after dark.</p>
+
+<p>One night the professor, after consulting various
+charts and maps, and making calculations which
+covered several sheets of paper announced:</p>
+
+<p>“We should sight the mysterious island to-morrow.”</p>
+
+<p>“That’s good news!” exclaimed Jack. “I’m
+anxious to see what’s below inside of that big hole.”</p>
+
+<p>“Everybody git ready for their funerals!” exclaimed
+Washington in a deep voice. “I ain’t got many——”</p>
+
+<p>“Cheer up,” interrupted Jack, poking Washington
+in the ribs. The colored man was very
+ticklish, and he began to laugh heartily, though,
+perhaps, he did not feel like it.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly, above the sound of his shouts, there
+came a crashing, grinding noise from the engine
+room.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch12' class='c008'>CHAPTER XII<br /><br />THE BIG HOLE</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>“Something has gone wrong!” exclaimed the
+professor as he jumped up. He reached the engine
+room ahead of any one else, and when the
+two boys got there they found him busy twisting
+wheels and shifting levers.</p>
+
+<p>“Anything serious?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s the gas machine again,” Mr. Henderson
+replied. “It broke where we fixed it. However
+it doesn’t matter. I was going to lower the ship
+anyhow, as I want to approach the island from the
+water. We will go down a little sooner than I
+counted on.”</p>
+
+<p>The disabling of the gas machine caused the vapor
+to escape slowly from the tank, and this made
+the ship sink gradually. By means of the emergency
+stop-cock the descent could be controlled almost
+as well as though the machinery was in working
+order. Half an hour later the <em>Mermaid</em> rested
+on the water.</p>
+
+<p>It was a little rough, as there was quite a swell
+on, and not so pleasant as floating in the air on
+an even keel, but they made the best of it.</p>
+
+<p>On account of the little accident, and not being
+certain of its extent, it was deemed best not to send
+the ship ahead. So they laid to until morning.</p>
+
+<p>For the better part of two days all those on
+board the <em>Mermaid</em> had their hands full mending
+the break and making other repairs found necessary.
+In that time they lay to, floating idly with
+the currents, or blown by the wind, for the professor
+would not start any of the engines or apparatus
+until the ship was in good condition.</p>
+
+<p>In this time Mark had several times recalled
+the curious happenings in regard to the disappearing
+food, and the mystery of the storeroom. But
+there were no further manifestations, and no other
+signs that there might be a strange visitor aboard.</p>
+
+<p>“I couldn’t have imagined it all,” said Mark,
+“but I guess what did happen may have been
+caused by natural means, only I can’t discover
+them.”</p>
+
+<p>It was about two days after this, the ship having
+sailed scores of miles on the surface of the water,
+that Mark, who was in the conning tower exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>“That looks like a waterspout ahead of us.”</p>
+
+<p>“That’s what it is!” Jack agreed. “What
+shall we do?”</p>
+
+<p>“Call the professor!” said Mark. “He’ll
+know.”</p>
+
+<p>When Mr. Henderson came, he looked for a
+long time at a cloud of black vapor which hung
+low in the east.</p>
+
+<p>“It may be a waterspout,” he said. “We’ll
+rise in the air and see if we can avoid it.”</p>
+
+<p>The ship was sent up into the air. As it rose
+higher and higher, the professor, making frequent
+observations from his conning tower, cried out:</p>
+
+<p>“That is no waterspout!”</p>
+
+<p>“What is it?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“It is the steam and vapor rising from the big
+hole in the earth! Boys, we are almost there!”</p>
+
+<p>“Are you sure that’s it?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Almost positive,” Mr. Henderson replied.
+“You can see how much warmer it has become
+of late, as we approached the equator. We are
+almost due at the island, and I have no doubt we
+have reached it.”</p>
+
+<p>As the ship flew forward the mass of dark vapor
+became more pronounced. Through the glasses
+it could be noticed to consist of rolling masses of
+clouds. What lay beneath them no one knew.
+The adventurers were going to try to find out.</p>
+
+<p>Now that they had arrived at the beginning of
+the main part of their journey, the travelers felt
+their spirits sink a little. It was one thing to plan
+to go down into the depths of the earth, but it was
+quite another to make the actual attempt. Still,
+they were not going to give up the project. The
+professor had confidence in his ship and believed
+it could safely make the trip. Still it was with no
+little apprehension that Mr. Henderson watched
+the nearer approach of the craft to that strange island.</p>
+
+<p>“Perfesser, are yo’ really an’ truly goin’ t’ depress
+this elongated spheroid an’ its human consignment
+int’ that conglomerous convoluted mass
+of gaseous vapor regardless of th’ consequences?”
+asked Washington, as he gazed with wide opened
+eyes at the sight before him.</p>
+
+<p>“If you mean am I going to let the <em>Mermaid</em>
+go down into that hole you are perfectly correct,”
+the scientist answered, “though you could have
+said it in fewer words, Washington.”</p>
+
+<p>“I—I guess I’ll get out an’ walk,” the colored
+man made reply.</p>
+
+<p>“This isn’t any trolley car,” observed Mark.
+“Don’t lose your nerve, Wash. Stay with us, and
+we’ll discover a gold or diamond mine, maybe.”</p>
+
+<p>“Is there diamonds down there?” asked the colored
+man, his fright seeming to leave him.</p>
+
+<p>“There are all sorts of things inside the earth,”
+the professor answered.</p>
+
+<p>“Then I’m goin’ along!” Washington
+declared. “I always did want a diamond ring, an’
+I knows a little colored gal that wants one, too.
+I’m goin’ all right! This suttenly am th’ most
+kloslosterous conjunctivity of combativeness that I
+ever sagaciated!” and he began to do a sort of
+impromptu cake-walk.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch13' class='c008'>CHAPTER XIII<br /><br />DOWN INTO THE EARTH</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>It was now noon, but the adventurers did not
+think of dinner in the excitement of approaching
+the mysterious island. The speed of the ship was
+increased that they might the more quickly come
+to it. As they approached they could see the
+masses of vapor more plainly, and it appeared that
+some great commotion must be going on inside the
+big hole, since clouds of steam arose.</p>
+
+<p>“I only hope it doesn’t prove too hot for us,”
+observed the professor. “However, I provided a
+water jacket for the ship, and we may need it, as
+well as the vacuum chambers to keep the heat from
+us.”</p>
+
+<p>It was about three o’clock when the flying ship
+reached the edge of the island. From there it
+was about a mile to the rim of the big hole, over
+one side of which the waters of the ocean poured
+with a roar that could be heard over half a mile
+off.</p>
+
+<p>“I think we had better halt and see that everything
+is in good shape before proceeding,” said
+Mr. Henderson. “Jack, you and Mark make a
+thorough inspection of the engine room, and see
+that all the apparatus is in working order.”</p>
+
+<p>The two boys prepared to do as they were told.
+Mark, who was walking a little ahead of Jack, entered
+the apartment from which the storeroom
+opened. As he did so he saw, or thought he saw,
+the door of the place where the extra supplies were
+kept, close. Without saying anything to Jack he
+hurried forward, and tried the knob. It would
+not turn.</p>
+
+<p>“That’s funny,” said Mark to himself. “I
+could almost swear I saw some one go into that
+room. Yet I know the professor did not enter,
+for I just left him. And none of the others would
+dare to. I wonder if I will ever solve the mystery.”</p>
+
+<p>But he had too much to do to allow him to
+dwell on that matter. Several of the dynamos
+needed adjusting and for two hours he and Jack
+had all they could do.</p>
+
+<p>In the meanwhile the professor had gone over
+the other parts of the ship, and gotten everything
+in readiness for the descent. The <em>Mermaid</em> was
+lowered to within a few hundred feet of the sea,
+and, through a hose that was let down, the compartments,
+provided for this emergency were filled
+with water. These compartments were between
+the outer and inner hulls of the lower part of the
+craft, and were designed to prevent the interior
+becoming heated in case the travelers found they
+had to pass close to fire. There were also vacuum
+chambers, and from these the air was exhausted, as
+of course every schoolboy knows a vacuum is a non-conductor
+of either heat or cold.</p>
+
+<p>“Now I think we are ready,” the professor announced
+at length.</p>
+
+<p>“Everything’s all right in the engine room,”
+announced Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“Yes, an’ everything’s all right in th’ kitchen,”
+put in Washington. “I’ve got a good meal ready
+as soon as any one wants to eat.”</p>
+
+<p>“It will have to wait a while,” Mr. Henderson
+remarked. “We are going to start to make the
+descent before we dine.”</p>
+
+<p>The hose was reeled up, and the ship was sent
+a few hundred feet higher into the air, as Mr.
+Henderson wanted to take a last good observation
+before he went down into the hole.</p>
+
+<p>But having risen some distance above the masses
+of rolling vapors he found he was at no advantage,
+since the strongest telescope he could bring to bear
+could not pierce the cloud masses.</p>
+
+<p>“We’ll just have to trust to luck,” the scientist
+said. “I judge we’re about over the centre of the
+opening. Lower away Mark!”</p>
+
+<p>The boy, who, under the watchful eye of the
+professor, was manipulating the levers and wheels
+in the conning tower, shifted some handles. The
+gas was expelled from the holder, the negative
+gravity apparatus ceased to work, and the <em>Flying
+Mermaid</em> sank lower and lower, toward the mysterious
+hole that yawned beneath her.</p>
+
+<p>The hearts of all beat strangely, if not with
+fear, at least with apprehension, for they did not
+know what they might encounter. Perhaps death
+in some terrible form awaited them. But the desire
+to discover something new and strange had
+gripped all of them, and not one would have
+voted to turn back.</p>
+
+<p>Even old Andy, who seldom got excited, was in
+unusual spirits. He took down his gun and remarked:</p>
+
+<p>“Maybe I can kill some new kind of animal,
+and write a book about its habits, for surely we
+will see strange beasts in the under-world.”</p>
+
+<p>Lower and lower sank the ship. Now it was
+amid the first thin masses of vapors, those that
+floated highest and were more like a light fog, than
+anything else. By means of a window in the bottom
+of the craft, which window was closed by a
+thick piece of plate glass, Professor Henderson
+could look down and see what was beneath them.</p>
+
+<p>“The clouds seem to be getting thicker,” he
+said, as he peered through the small casement.
+“If they would only clear away we could see something.”</p>
+
+<p>But instead of doing this the vapors accumulated
+more thickly about the ship. It was so dark inside
+the <em>Mermaid</em> now that the electric lights had to be
+switched on. In the room with the floor-window
+the lights were not used, as had they shone one
+could not have seen down below.</p>
+
+<p>The professor maintained his position. The descent
+was a perilous one, and he wanted to be on
+the watch to check it at once if the <em>Mermaid</em> was
+liable to dash upon some pointed rock or fall into
+some fiery pit. His hand was on the signal levers.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly he looked up and glanced at a gage on
+the wall. The hand of it was slowly revolving.</p>
+
+<p>“We are at the earth’s surface,” the scientist
+said. “Now we are below it. Now we are fairly
+within the big hole! Boys, we may be on the
+verge of a great discovery!”</p>
+
+<p>An instant later it seemed as if a hot wave had
+struck the <em>Mermaid</em>, or as if the craft had been
+plunged into boiling water.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s going to be hot!” cried the professor.
+“Lucky I provided the water jackets!”</p>
+
+<p>Then the lights in the interior of the ship went
+out, leaving the whole craft in darkness.</p>
+
+<p>“What has happened?” cried Mark.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch14' class='c008'>CHAPTER XIV<br /><br />MANY MILES BELOW</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>“Don’t be alarmed,” spoke the calm voice of
+the professor. “I have only turned off the electrics.
+I want to switch on the search lights, to
+see if we can learn anything about our position.”</p>
+
+<p>As he spoke he turned a switch, and, the gloom
+below the ship, as the boys could see by glimpses
+from the floor-window, was pierced by a dazzling
+glare. In the bottom of the <em>Mermaid</em> were set a
+number of powerful electric arc lights with reflectors,
+constructed to throw the beams downward.
+The professor had built them in for just this emergency,
+as he thought that at some time they might
+want to illuminate what was below the craft.</p>
+
+<p>Not that it was of much avail on this occasion,
+for, though the lights were powerful, they could
+not pierce the miles of gloom that lay below them.
+The beams only served to accentuate the darkness.</p>
+
+<p>“I guess we’ll have to trust to luck,” the professor
+said, after a vain attempt, by means of powerful
+glasses, to distinguish something. “There
+is too much fog and vapor.”</p>
+
+<p>“What makes it so warm?” asked Mark, removing
+his coat.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, you must remember you are approaching
+the interior of the earth,” the professor answered.
+“It has been calculated that the heat increases
+one degree for every fifty-five feet you descend.
+We have come down several hundred feet
+and of course it is getting warmer.”</p>
+
+<p>“Then if we go down very far it will get so
+hot we will not be able to stand it,” Jack put in.</p>
+
+<p>“I do not believe we will suffer any great inconvenience,”
+Mr. Henderson went on. “I believe
+that after we pass a certain point it will become
+cooler. I think the inner fires of the earth
+are more or less heated gas in a sort of inner chamber
+between two shells. If we can pass the second
+shell, we will be all right.”</p>
+
+<p>“But aren’t we liable to hit something, going
+down into the dark this way?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“We will guard ourselves as far as possible,”
+the scientist answered.</p>
+
+<p>The <em>Mermaid</em> seemed to be going down on a
+side of the immense shaft a good way distant from
+the strange waterfall. When they had first
+dropped into the hole the travelers could hear
+the rush of waters, but now the noise was not
+audible.</p>
+
+<p>“I think the hole must widen out the farther
+down we go,” the professor said. “We are probably
+many miles from the fall now.”</p>
+
+<p>“I’m sure I hope so,” put in Jack. “It would
+be no fun to have to take a shower bath in this
+place.”</p>
+
+<p>After a meal, the boys and the professor took
+some more observations, but with all their efforts
+nothing could be seen below the ship but a vast
+black void, into which they were steadily descending.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder when we’re going to stop,” asked
+Mark. “It’s like playing the game ‘Going to
+Jerusalem,’ you keep wondering when the music
+will cease and you will have a chance to grab a
+chair. I only hope we have a chair or something
+else to sit on, in case we go to smash.”</p>
+
+<p>“We’re not liable to have any accidents with the
+professor in charge,” Jack answered. “Didn’t
+he bring us safe out of some pretty tight holes when
+we went to the north pole in the airship, and again
+when we found the south pole in the submarine?”</p>
+
+<p>“Yes, but this is different,” objected Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, I’m not worrying,” Jack went on. “It
+doesn’t do any good, and only makes you lie
+awake nights. By the way, I wonder what time
+it is getting to be.”</p>
+
+<p>He looked at his watch and found it was close
+on to eight o’clock in the evening. So late had
+dinner been served, and so varied were the happenings
+of the last few hours, that time had passed quickly.</p>
+
+<p>“Why it’s almost bed-time,” said Jack. “I
+wonder if we are to go on dropping into the depths
+of nowhere all night.”</p>
+
+<p>At that moment the professor entered the room
+where the boys were. He seemed quite pleased
+over something, and was smiling.</p>
+
+<p>“Everything is going along famously,” he said.
+“I have just tested the air and find it is rich in
+oxygen. We shall suffer nothing on that score.
+The heat too, seems to have decreased. On the
+whole, everything favors us.”</p>
+
+<p>“Are we going on down?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“As far as we can,” Mr. Henderson answered.
+“Let me see how far we are below now.”</p>
+
+<p>He went to the gage that indicated the vertical
+position of the ship. Because of the changed conditions,
+the craft now sinking below the surface
+of the earth instead of rising above it, as was its
+wont, some calculations were necessary. These
+the scientist made as quickly as he could.</p>
+
+<p>“We are now ten miles underground!” he exclaimed.
+“That is doing very well. My theories
+are working out. I think we shall land somewhere
+before long.”</p>
+
+<p>“I hopes so!” exclaimed Washington coming
+in at this point. “I’m mighty skeered shootin’
+down int’ this dark hole, and no time-table t’ show
+when we’s due t’ arrive.”</p>
+
+<p>“We ought to land in a couple of days more,”
+the professor answered. “Never mind about
+worrying Washington, I’ll take care of you.”</p>
+
+<p>“I hopes so, Perfesser,” the colored man said.
+“I got a little girl waitin’ for me back in Georgia,
+an’ I’d like t’ see her 'fore I git burned up.”</p>
+
+<p>Accompanied by the professor, the boys made a
+tour of the ship to see that all the machinery and
+apparatus were in working order. Owing to the
+changed conditions the negative gravity engine had
+to be worked at faster speed than usual, since the
+downward pull of the earth was greater the farther
+they descended into the interior and they did not
+want to fall too swiftly. But this was easily provided
+for, since the professor had made the apparatus
+capable of standing a great strain.</p>
+
+<p>The ten miles had become fourteen when the
+professor, finding that everything was in good
+shape, proposed that the boys go to bed. They
+did not want to, though they were sleepy, and they
+feared to miss some strange sights.</p>
+
+<p>But when the professor had promised to call
+them in case anything unusual developed, they consented
+to turn in, and Bill and Tom assumed their
+duties, which were light enough, now that the ship
+was merely falling into the immense shaft.</p>
+
+<p>When Mark turned into his bunk he could not
+go to sleep at once. It may have been the excitement
+over their new position, or because he had
+eaten too hearty a supper, but the fact was he remained
+awake for some time.</p>
+
+<p>While thus tossing restlessly on his bed, wondering
+what ailed him, he thought he heard a noise
+in the main apartment out of which the storeroom
+opened. He crawled softly from his bed, and
+looked from his stateroom door.</p>
+
+<p>In the light of a shaded electric Mark saw the
+figure of some one glide across the floor and take
+refuge in the room, which Professor Henderson
+always was so particular about.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder what or who that was,” reasoned
+Mark. “There is some mystery in this. Can
+the professor have concealed some one on this
+ship whose presence he does not want to admit?
+It certainly looks so.”</p>
+
+<p>Not wanting to awaken the ship’s crew, and remembering
+what Mr. Henderson had said about
+any one entering the storeroom, Mark went back
+to bed, to fall into an uneasy slumber.</p>
+
+<p>“Breakfast!” called Washington breaking in
+on a fine dream Jack was having about being captain
+of a company of automobile soldiers. “Last
+call for breakfast!”</p>
+
+<p>“Hello! Is it morning?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“Not so’s you could notice it,” Washington went
+on. “It’s as dark as a stack of black cats and another
+one throwed in. But breakfast is ready jest
+the same.”</p>
+
+<p>The boys were soon at the table, and learned
+that nothing of importance had occurred during
+the night. The <em>Mermaid</em> had been kept going
+slowly down, and about seven o’clock registered
+more than fifty miles below the earth’s surface.</p>
+
+<p>Still there was no change in the outward surroundings.
+It remained as black as the interior of
+Egypt when that country was at its darkest. The
+powerful electrics could not pierce the gloom. The
+ship was working well, and the travelers were very
+comfortable.</p>
+
+<p>Down, down, down, went the <em>Mermaid</em>. The
+temperature, which had risen to about ninety went
+back to sixty-nine, and there seemed to be no more
+danger from the inner fires.</p>
+
+<p>They were now a hundred miles under the surface.
+But still the professor kept the <em>Mermaid</em>
+sinking. Every now and again he would take an
+observation, but only found the impenetrable darkness
+surrounded them.</p>
+
+<p>“We must arrive somewhere, soon,” he muttered.</p>
+
+<p>It was about six o’clock that night that the alarm
+bell set up a sudden ringing. The professor who
+was making some calculations on a piece of paper
+jumped to his feet, and so did a number of the
+others.</p>
+
+<p>“We are nearing the bottom!” he cried.
+“The bell has given us warning!”</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch15' class='c008'>CHAPTER XV<br /><br />IN THE STRANGE DRAUGHT</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>The boys ran to attend to the engines and apparatus
+to which they had been assigned in view
+of this emergency. The professor, Washington,
+Bill, Tom and Andy, who had kept to themselves
+since the descent, came running out of the small
+cabin where they usually sat, and wanted to know
+what it was all about.</p>
+
+<p>“We may hit something, in spite of all
+precautions,” Mr. Henderson remarked. “Slow
+down the ship.”</p>
+
+<p>The <em>Mermaid</em> was, accordingly checked in her
+downward flight, by a liberal use of the gas and
+the negative gravity machine.</p>
+
+<p>The bell continued to ring, and the dials
+pointed to the mark that indicated the ship was
+more than one hundred and fifty miles down.</p>
+
+<p>Mark, who had run to the engine room to check
+the descent, came back.</p>
+
+<p>“Why didn’t you slow her down?” asked the
+professor.</p>
+
+<p>“I did,” replied the boy. “The negative gravity
+and the gas machines are working at full
+speed.”</p>
+
+<p>“Then why are we still descending?” asked the
+scientist. “For a while our speed was checked,
+but now we are falling faster than before.”</p>
+
+<p>“I attended to the apparatus,” Mark insisted.</p>
+
+<p>Just then, from without the ship, came a terrible
+roaring sound, as though there was a great cyclone
+in progress. At the same time, those aboard the
+craft could feel themselves being pulled downward
+with terrific force.</p>
+
+<p>“We are caught in a draught!” Mr. Henderson
+cried. “We are being sucked down into the
+depths of the earth!”</p>
+
+<p>He ran to the engine room. With the help
+of the boys he set in motion an auxiliary gravity
+machine, designed to exert a most powerful influence
+against the downward pull of the earth. As
+they watched the great wheels spin around, and
+heard the hum and whirr of the dynamos, the boys
+watched the pointer which indicated how low they
+were getting.</p>
+
+<p>And, as they watched, they saw that the needle
+of the dial kept moving, moving, moving.</p>
+
+<p>“Our efforts are useless! We can’t stop!”
+the professor cried.</p>
+
+<p>Grave indeed was the plight of the adventurers.
+In their ship they were being sucked down into
+unknown regions and all their efforts did not avail
+to save them. It was an emergency they could
+not guard against, and which could not have been
+foreseen.</p>
+
+<p>“What are to do?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“We can only wait,” Mr. Henderson replied.
+“The terrible suction may cease, or it may carry
+us to some place of safety. Let us hope for the
+best.”</p>
+
+<p>Seeing there was no further use in running the
+engines in an effort to check the downward rush the
+machines were stopped. Then they waited for
+whatever might happen.</p>
+
+<p>Now that they seemed in imminent peril Washington
+was as cool as any one. He went about
+putting his kitchen in order and getting ready for
+the next meal as if they were sailing comfortably
+along on the surface of the ocean. As for old
+Andy he was nervous and frightened, and plainly
+showed it. With his gun in readiness he paced
+back and forth as if on the lookout for strange
+beasts or birds.</p>
+
+<p>Bill and Tom were so alarmed that they were of
+little use in doing anything, and they were not
+disturbed in their staterooms where they went when
+it became known that the ship was unmanageable.</p>
+
+<p>The boys and the professor, while greatly frightened
+at the unexpected turn of events, decided
+there was no use in giving way to foolish alarm.
+They realized they could do nothing but await developments.</p>
+
+<p>At the same time they took every precaution.
+They piled all the bedding on the floor of the living
+room, so that the pillows and mattresses might
+form a sort of pad in case the ship was dashed
+down on the bottom of the big hole.</p>
+
+<p>“Not that it would save us much,” Jack observed
+with a grim smile, “but somehow it sort
+of makes your mind easier.”</p>
+
+<p>All this while the ship was being sucked down
+at a swift pace. The pointer of the gage, indicating
+the depth, kept moving around and soon they
+were several hundreds of miles below the surface
+of the earth.</p>
+
+<p>The professor tried, by means of several instruments,
+to discover in which direction they were
+headed, and whether they were going straight
+down or at an angle. But some strange influence
+seemed to affect the gages and other pieces of apparatus,
+for the pointers and hands would swing
+in all directions, at one time indicating that they
+were going down, and, again, upward.</p>
+
+<p>“There must be a strong current of electricity
+here,” Mr. Henderson said, “or else there is, as
+many suspect, a powerful magnet at the center of
+the earth, which we are nearing.”</p>
+
+<p>“What will you do if the ship is pulled apart,
+or falls and is smashed?” asked Mark with much
+anxiety.</p>
+
+<p>“You take a cheerful view of things,” said Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, it’s a good thing to prepare for emergencies,”
+Mark added.</p>
+
+<p>“If the ship was to be separated by the magnetic
+pull, or if it fell on sharp rocks and was
+split in twain, I am afraid none of us could do anything
+to save ourselves,” the professor answered.
+“Still, if we were given a little warning of the
+disaster, I have means at hand whereby we might
+escape with our lives. But it would be a perilous
+way of——”</p>
+
+<p>“I reckon yo’ all better come out an’ have supper,”
+broke in Washington. “Leastways we’ll
+call it supper, though I don’t rightly know whether
+it’s night or mornin’. Anyhow I’ve got a meal
+ready.”</p>
+
+<p>“I don’t suppose any of us feel much like eating,”
+observed Mr. Henderson, “but there is no
+telling when we will have the chance again, so, perhaps,
+we had better take advantage of it.”</p>
+
+<p>For a while they ate in silence, finding that they
+had better appetites than they at first thought.
+Old Andy in particular did full justice to the food
+Washington had prepared.</p>
+
+<p>“I always found it a good plan to eat as much
+and as often as you can,” the hunter remarked.
+“This is a mighty uncertain world.”</p>
+
+<p>“You started to tell us a little while ago, Professor,”
+said Mark, “about a plan you had for
+saving out lives if worst came to worst, and there
+was a chance to put it into operation. What is
+it?”</p>
+
+<p>“I will tell you,” the aged inventor said. “It
+is something about which I have kept silent, as I
+did not want to frighten any of you. It was my
+latest invention, and I had only perfected it when
+we started off on this voyage. Consequently I
+had no chance to try it. The machine works in
+theory, but whether it does in practice is another
+question. That is why I say there is a risk. But
+we may have to take this risk. I have placed
+aboard this ship a——”</p>
+
+<p>The professor was interrupted in what he was
+about to say by a curious tremor that made the
+whole ship shiver as though it had struck some
+obstruction. Yet there was no sudden jolt or jar
+such as would have been occasioned by that.</p>
+
+<p>At the same time Washington, who was out in
+the kitchen, came running into the dining room,
+crying:</p>
+
+<p>“We’re droppin’ into a ragin’ fire, Perfesser!”</p>
+
+<p>“What do you mean?” asked Mr. Henderson.</p>
+
+<p>“I jest took a look down through th’ hole in
+th’ bottom of the ship!” cried Washington. “It’s
+all flames an’ smoke below us!”</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder if it is the end,” the professor muttered
+in a low voice.</p>
+
+<p>Followed by the boys, the inventor hastened
+to the floor-window. The lights were turned off
+to enable a better view to be had of what was
+below them.</p>
+
+<p>Leaning over the glass protected aperture the
+boys and the professor saw, far, far down, a
+bright light shining. It was as if they were
+miles above a whole town of blast furnaces, the
+stacks of which were belching forth flames and
+smoke. The rolling clouds of vapor were illuminated
+by a peculiar greenish light, which, at times,
+turned to red, blue, purple and yellowish hues.</p>
+
+<p>The effect was weird and beautiful though it
+was full of terror for the travelers. It seemed
+as if they were falling into some terrible pit of
+fire, for the reflection of what they feared were
+flames, could plainly be seen.</p>
+
+<p>“I wish I’d never come on this terrible voyage!”
+wailed Washington. “I’d rather freeze
+to death than be burned up.”</p>
+
+<p>“Washington, be quiet!” commanded the professor
+sternly. “This is no time for foolishness.
+We must work hard to save our lives, for we are
+in dire peril.</p>
+
+<p>“Mark, you and Washington, with Jack, start
+the engines. Turn on every bit of power you can.
+Fill the gas holder as full as it will hold, and
+use extra heavy pressure. I will see if I can not
+work the negative gravity apparatus to better advantage
+than we did before. We must escape
+if possible!”</p>
+
+<p>The boys, as was also Washington, were only
+too glad to have something to do to take their
+mind off their troubles. All three were much
+frightened, but Mark and Jack tried not to show
+it. As for Washington he was almost crying.</p>
+
+<p>Soon the whirr and hum of the machinery in
+the <em>Mermaid</em> was heard. The craft, which was
+rushing in some direction, either downward, ahead
+or backwards within the unknown depths, shivered
+from the speed of the dynamos and other apparatus.
+Soon the boys could hear the professor
+starting the negative gravity engine, and then
+began a struggle between the forces of nature and
+those of mankind.</p>
+
+<p>Once more the adventurers anxiously watched
+the gages and indicators. For a while the ship
+seemed to be holding out against the terrible influence
+that was sucking her down. She appeared
+to hesitate. Then, as the downward force triumphed
+over the mechanical energy in the craft,
+she began to settle again, and soon was descending,
+if that was the direction, as fast as before.</p>
+
+<p>“It is of no use,” said the professor with a
+groan. “I must try our last resort!”</p>
+
+<p>He started from the engine room where Mark
+and Jack had gone. As he did so, he glanced at
+a thermometer hanging on the wall near the door.</p>
+
+<p>“Has any one turned on the heat?” he asked.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s shut off,” replied Mark, looking at the
+electric stove.</p>
+
+<p>“Then what makes it so hot?” asked the scientist.</p>
+
+<p>He pointed to the little silvery column in the
+tiny tube of the instrument. It registered close
+to one hundred degrees, though a few minutes
+before it had been but sixty. And the starting
+of the machinery could not account for the rise
+in temperature, since most of the apparatus was
+run by electricity and developed little heat save
+in the immediate proximity. The thermometer
+was fully ten feet away from any machine.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s the fiery furnace that’s doing it!” cried
+Washington. “We’re falling into th’ terrible pit
+an’ we’re goin’ t’ be roasted alive!”</p>
+
+<p>“It certainly is getting warmer,” observed
+Mark, as he took off his coat. Soon he had to
+shed his vest, and Jack and the professor followed
+his example. The others too, also found all superfluous
+garments a burden, and, in a little while
+they were going about in scanty attire.</p>
+
+<p>Still the heat increased, until it was almost torture
+to remain in the engine room. Nor was it
+much cooler elsewhere. In vain did the professor
+set a score of big electric fans to whirring. He
+even placed cakes of ice, from the small ice machine
+that was carried, in front of the revolving
+blades, to cool off the air. But the ice was melted
+almost as soon as it was taken from the apparatus.</p>
+
+<p>“Them flames is gittin worser!” Washington
+cried a little later. “We’s comin’ nearer!”</p>
+
+<p>From the bottom window the professor and the
+boys looked down. True enough the curious,
+changing, vari-colored lights seemed brighter.
+They could almost see the tongues of flame shooting
+upward in anticipation of what they were
+soon to devour.</p>
+
+<p>The heat was increasing every minute. The
+sides of the ship were hot. The heads of the
+travelers were getting dizzy. They could hardly
+talk or move about.</p>
+
+<p>“I must save our lives! I must trust to
+the——” The professor, who was muttering to
+himself started toward the storeroom. As in
+a dream Mark watched him. He remembered
+afterward that he had speculated on what might be
+the outcome of the mystery the professor threw
+about the place. “I will have to use it,” he heard
+the scientist say softly.</p>
+
+<p>Just as Mr. Henderson was about to open the
+door there came a fiercer blast of heat than any
+that had preceded. At the same instant the conditions
+in the <em>Mermaid</em> became so fearful that
+each of the travelers felt himself fainting away.</p>
+
+<p>“Go to—storeroom—get cylinder—get in——”
+the professor murmured, and then he fell
+forward in a faint.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch16' class='c008'>CHAPTER XVI<br /><br />THE NEW LAND</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>“What is it? Tell us!” exclaimed Jack,
+almost in his last breath, for, a few seconds later
+he too toppled over senseless. Then Washington
+went down, while Andy, Bill and Tom succumbed
+to the terrible heat.</p>
+
+<p>Mark felt his head swimming. His eyes were
+almost bulging from their sockets. He dimly
+remembered trying to force himself to go to the
+storeroom and see what was there. He started
+toward it with that intention, but fell half way
+to it.</p>
+
+<p>As he did so he saw something which impressed
+itself on his mind, half unconscious as he was.</p>
+
+<p>The door of the storeroom suddenly opened,
+and from it came a giant shape, that seemed to
+expand until it filled the whole of the apartment
+where the stricken ones lay. It was like the form
+of some monster, half human, half beast. Mark
+shuddered, and then, closing his eyes, he felt himself
+sinking down into some terrible deep and
+black pit. A second later the whole ship was
+jarred as though it had hit something.</p>
+
+<p>How long he and the others remained unconscious
+Mark did not know. He was the first to
+revive, and his first sensation was one as though
+he had slept hard and long, and did not want
+to get up. He felt very comfortable, although
+he was lying flat on the floor, with his head jammed
+against the side of a locker. It was so dark that
+he could not distinguish his hand held close to his
+face.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder if I’m dead, and if all the others
+are dead too,” he thought to himself. “What
+has happened? Let’s see, the last I remember
+was some horrible shape rushing from the storeroom.
+I wonder what it could have been? Surely
+that was not the secret the professor referred to.”</p>
+
+<p>Mark shuddered as he recalled the monster that
+seemed to have grown more terrible as each second
+passed. Then the boy raised himself up from
+his prostrate position.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, at any rate, some one has turned off
+the heat,” he murmured. “It’s very comfortable
+in here now. I wish I could strike a light.”</p>
+
+<p>He listened intently, to learn if any of the
+others were moving about. He could hear them
+breathing, but so faintly as to indicate they were
+insensible. Mark stretched out his hand and felt
+that some one was lying close to him, but who
+of the adventurers it was he could not determine.</p>
+
+<p>“If only the dynamo was working we could
+have light,” he said. “But it seems to have
+stopped,” and, indeed there was a lacking of the
+familiar purr and hum of the electrical machine.
+In fact none of the apparatus in the ship was
+working.</p>
+
+<p>“The storage battery!” exclaimed Mark.
+“That would give light for a while, if I can only
+find the switch in the dark.”</p>
+
+<p>He began crawling about on his hands and
+knees. It was so intensely black that he ran into
+many things and received severe bruises. At last
+he came to a doorway, and as he did so his hand
+came in contact with an easy chair. It was the
+only one aboard, and by that he knew he had
+passed into the sitting room. He had his general
+direction now, and knew if he kept straight on
+he would come to the engine room. There he
+was familiar enough with the apparatus and levers
+to be able to turn the electric switch.</p>
+
+<p>Crawling slowly and cautiously, he reached the
+room where all the engines were. Then he had
+to feel around the sides to locate the switch. At
+length he found it. There was a click, a little
+flash of greenish fire, and the copper conductors
+came together, and the ship was flooded with the
+glow from the incandescents.</p>
+
+<p>Mark hurried back to where the others were
+lying. They were still unconscious, but an uneasy
+movement on the part of Jack told that he was
+coming out of the stupor. Mark got some ammonia
+and held it beneath his comrade’s nose. The
+strong fumes completed the work that nature had
+started and Jack opened his eyes.</p>
+
+<p>“Where am I? What has happened? Are
+any of them dead?” he asked quickly.</p>
+
+<p>“I hope no one is dead,” Mark replied. “As
+to the other question, I can’t answer. I don’t
+know whether we are a thousand miles underground,
+or floating on the ocean, though I’m more
+inclined to the former theory. But never mind
+that now. Help me to bring the others back
+to their senses. I’ll work on the professor and
+you can begin on Bill or Tom. Washington seems
+to be all right,” for at that moment the colored
+man opened his eyes, stared about him and then
+got up.</p>
+
+<p>“I thought I was dead for suah!” he exclaimed.</p>
+
+<p>“Some of the others may be if we don’t hurry,”
+said Mark. “Get to work, Wash!”</p>
+
+<p>With the colored man to help them the two
+boys, by the use of the ammonia, succeeded in
+reviving Bill, Tom and old Andy. But the professor,
+probably on account of his advanced age,
+did not respond so readily to the treatment. The
+boys were getting quite alarmed, as even some of
+the diluted ammonia, forced between his lips, did
+not cause him to open his eyes, or increase his
+heart action.</p>
+
+<p>“If he should die, and leave us all alone with
+the ship in this terrible place, what would we do?”
+asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“He’s not going to die!” exclaimed Mark.
+“Here I have another plan. Washington bring
+that medical electrical battery from the engine
+room.” This was a small machine the professor
+had brought along for experimental purposes.</p>
+
+<p>Quickly adjusting it, Mark placed the handles
+in the nerveless fingers of Mr. Henderson. Then
+he started the current. In about a minute the
+eyelids of the aged inventor began to quiver, and,
+in less than five minutes he had been revived sufficiently
+to enable him to sit up. He passed his
+hand across his forehead.</p>
+
+<p>“What has happened?” he asked in a faint
+voice.</p>
+
+<p>“I don’t know; none of us knows,” Mark
+answered. “We all lost our senses when it got
+so hot, and there seemed to be some peculiar vapor
+in the air. The last I remember was seeing some
+horrible shape rush from the storeroom, soon after
+the ship struck. Then I fainted away. When
+I woke up I managed to turn the lights on, and
+then I came back here.”</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder where we are,” the old man murmured.
+“I must find out. We must take every
+precaution. Washington, go and look at the gage
+indicating our depth.”</p>
+
+<p>The colored man was gone but a few seconds.
+When he returned his eyes were bulging in terror.</p>
+
+<p>“What is it?” asked Mr. Henderson, who,
+thanks to the battery, had almost completely recovered.</p>
+
+<p>“It ain’t possible!” gasped Washington. “I’ll
+never believe it!”</p>
+
+<p>“What is it?” asked Mr. Henderson, while
+the others waited in anxiety for the answer.</p>
+
+<p>“We’re five hundred miles down!” declared
+Washington.</p>
+
+<p>“Five hundred miles!” muttered the inventor.
+“It does not seem possible, but it must be so. We
+fell very rapidly and the terrible draught sucked
+us down with incredible rapidity. But come, we
+must see what our situation is, and where we are.
+We are stationary, and are evidently on some
+solid substance.”</p>
+
+<p>They all felt much recovered now, and, as the
+terrible fright of being consumed in a fiery furnace
+had passed, they all were in better spirits.</p>
+
+<p>At the suggestion of the professor, the boys
+and Washington made a tour of the ship. They
+found, for some unaccountable reason, that nearly
+all the engines and apparatuses were out of gear.
+In some the parts had broken, and others were
+merely stopped, from the failure of some other
+machine, on which they were dependent.</p>
+
+<p>“I’m afraid this is the end of the <em>Mermaid,”</em>
+said Mark, in a sorrowful tone.</p>
+
+<p>“Nonsense!” replied Jack, who was of a more
+cheerful nature. “Things are not so bad as they
+look. The professor can fix everything.”</p>
+
+<p>“I’m sure I hope so,” Mark went on, not much
+encouraged, however, by Jack’s philosophy. “It
+would be no joke to have to stay five hundred
+miles underground the rest of our lives.”</p>
+
+<p>“You don’t know,” retorted Jack. “Don’t
+judge of a country you’ve never seen. This may
+be as fine a place as it is on the surface of the earth.
+I want a chance to see it,” and Jack began to
+whistle a cheerful tune.</p>
+
+<p>They completed the tour of the ship, and found,
+that, aside from the damage to the machinery,
+the <em>Mermaid</em> had not sustained any harm. The
+hull was in good order, though of course they
+could not tell about the gas holder. It was not
+possible to see this except by going into the conning
+tower or out on the small deck, and this they did
+not venture to do. The connections between the
+holder and the main ship seemed to be all right,
+and there was still a small quantity of gas in the
+big tank, as Mark found on opening a stop-cock.</p>
+
+<p>They went back to the professor and told him
+what they had observed. He seemed somewhat
+alarmed, the more so as the experience he had
+just passed through had weakened him considerably.</p>
+
+<p>“I hope I shall be able to make the repairs,”
+he said. “It is our only hope.”</p>
+
+<p>As he spoke he looked up at the electric lights
+that shone overhead from wall brackets.</p>
+
+<p>“Who is shutting down the power?” he asked.</p>
+
+<p>“There is no power on, Professor,” replied
+Mark. “I am running the lights from the storage
+battery. But something is the matter, for they
+are growing dim.”</p>
+
+<p>The filaments were now mere dull red wires,
+and the ship was being shrouded in gloom again.</p>
+
+<p>“The battery is failing!” exclaimed Mr. Henderson.
+“We shall be left in darkness, and there
+is no other way to produce light. I ought to have
+brought some lamps or candles along in case of
+emergency.”</p>
+
+<p>The next instant the <em>Mermaid</em> became as black
+as Egypt is popularly supposed to be, and something
+like an exclamation of terror came from the
+professor.</p>
+
+<p>For several minutes they all sat there in the
+blackness and gloom, waiting for they knew not
+what. Then, suddenly, there sounded throughout
+the ship, a creaking as of metal sliding along
+metal. Some big lever creaked, and, a second
+later the whole place was flooded with light.</p>
+
+<p>“What has happened?” cried the professor,
+starting to his feet in alarm.</p>
+
+<p>“We are going to be burned up!” exclaimed
+old Andy.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s all right! It’s all right!” yelled Washington
+from the engine room where the boys had
+left him. “Don’t git skeered! I done it! I
+opened the port holes, by yanking on the lever.
+Golly, but we’s arrived at the new land! Look
+out, everybody!”</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch17' class='c008'>CHAPTER XVII<br /><br />A STRANGE COUNTRY</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>They all ran to the port holes, which were
+openings in the side of the ship. They were fitted
+with thick, double glass, and covered on the outside
+with steel shutters. These shutters were
+worked by a single lever from the engine room,
+so that one person could open or close them in
+a second or two. Washington, by accident, it
+appeared later, had slid back the protecting pieces
+of steel, and the rest followed.</p>
+
+<p>As the adventurers looked from the glass ports
+they saw that the light which had flooded the
+ship came from without. They were in the midst
+of a beautiful glow, which seemed to be diffused
+about them like rays from a sun.</p>
+
+<p>Only, in place of being a yellow or white light,
+such as the sun gives off at varying times, the glow
+was of violet hue. And, as they watched, they
+saw the light change color, becoming a beautiful
+red, then blue, and again green.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, this is certainly remarkable!” the professor
+said. “I wonder what causes that.”</p>
+
+<p>“We’ve arrived! We’re here, anyhow!”
+Washington cried, coming into the room. “See
+the country!”</p>
+
+<p>Then, for the first time, the travelers, taking
+their attention from the curious light that was all
+around them, saw that they had indeed arrived.
+They were on a vast plain, one, seemingly, boundless
+in extent, though off to the left there was a
+range of lofty mountains, while to the right there
+was the glimmer of what might be a big lake or
+inland sea.</p>
+
+<p>“See, we are resting on the ground!” exclaimed
+Jack. He pointed out of the window,
+and the others, looking close at hand, noted that
+the <em>Mermaid</em> had settled down in the midst of
+what seemed to be a field of flowers. Big red
+and yellow blossoms were all in front, and some
+grew so tall as to almost be up to the edge of the
+port.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder if we can be seeing aright,” the professor
+muttered. “Is this really the interior of
+the earth; such a beautiful place as this?”</p>
+
+<p>There could be little doubt of it. The ship
+had descended through the big shaft, had been
+sucked down by the terrible air current, and had
+really landed in a strange country.</p>
+
+<p>Of its size, shape and general conditions the
+adventurers, as yet, could but guess. They could
+see it was a pleasant place, and one where there
+might be the means to sustain life. For, as the
+professor said afterward, he felt that where there
+were flowers there would be fruits, and where both
+of these provisions of nature were to be found
+there would likely be animal life, and even, perhaps,
+human beings.</p>
+
+<p>But, for the time, they were content to look
+from the port on the beautiful scene that lay
+stretched out before them. The ship rested on
+an even keel and had landed so softly that none
+of the plates were strained.</p>
+
+<p>“We have plenty of air, at all events,” said
+the professor as he took a deep breath. “I was
+afraid of that, but it seems there was no need.
+The air appears to be as good and fresh as that
+on the surface of the earth, only there is a curious
+property to it. It makes one feel larger. I
+imagine it must be thinner than the air of the
+earth, which is a rather strange thing, since the
+higher one goes the more rarefied the air becomes,
+and the lower, the more dense. Still we can not
+apply natural philosophy to conditions under the
+earth. All the usual theories may be upset. However,
+we should be content to take things as we
+find them, and be glad we were not dashed to
+pieces when the ship was caught in the terrible
+current.”</p>
+
+<p>“What do you suppose caused the awful heat,
+and then made it go away again?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“I can only make a guess at it,” Mr. Henderson
+answered. “There are many strange things
+we will come across if we stay here long, I believe.
+As for the fire I think we must have passed a sort
+of interior volcano.”</p>
+
+<p>“But what sort of a place do you think we have
+come to, Professor?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“It is hard to say,” the scientist replied. “We
+are certainly somewhere within the earth. Our
+gage tells us it is five hundred miles. That may
+or may not be correct, but I believe we are several
+hundred miles under the crust, at all events. As
+to what sort of a place it is, you can see for yourselves.”</p>
+
+<p>“But how is it we can breathe here, and things
+can grow?” asked Bill, who was beginning to
+lose his fright at the thought of being practically
+buried alive.</p>
+
+<p>“I do not know what makes such things possible,”
+Mr. Henderson replied, “but that there is
+air here is a certainty. I can hardly believe it is
+drawn from the surface of the earth, down the
+big hole, and I am inclined to think this place
+of the under-world has an atmosphere of its own,
+and one which produces different effects than does
+our own.”</p>
+
+<p>“They certainly have larger flowers than we
+have,” said Mark. “See how big they grow,
+and what strong colors they have.”</p>
+
+<p>He pointed to the port, against which some
+of the blooms were nodding in the wind that had
+sprung up, for, in spite of the many differences,
+the under-world was in some respects like the
+upper one.</p>
+
+<p>“Probably the difference in the atmosphere accounts
+for that,” the professor said. “It enables
+things to grow larger. And, by the way, Mark,
+that reminds me of something you said about seeing
+some horrible monster fleeing from the ship.
+Did you dream that?”</p>
+
+<p>“I did see something horrible, Professor,” he
+answered. “I’m not positive what it was, but
+I’ll tell you as nearly as I can what it was like.”</p>
+
+<p>Thereupon Mark detailed what he had seen.</p>
+
+<p>“But how could anything, least of all some big
+monster, be concealed in the storeroom, and we
+not know anything about it?” asked Mr. Henderson.</p>
+
+<p>“I thought you did know something of it,”
+replied Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Who, me? My dear boy, you must be dreaming
+again. Why should I want to conceal any
+being in the storeroom? Come, there is something
+back of this. Tell me all you know of it. I can’t
+imagine why you think I was hiding something
+in the apartment.”</p>
+
+<p>“I thought so because you were always so
+anxious not to have me go near it,” answered the
+boy. “Don’t you remember when you saw me
+going toward it, several times, you warned me
+away?”</p>
+
+<p>“So I did!” exclaimed Mr. Henderson, a light
+breaking over his face. “But, Mark, it was not
+because I had hidden some human being or animal
+there. I can’t tell you what it is yet, save that I
+can say it is merely a machine of mine that I have
+invented. For reasons of my own I don’t want
+any one to see it yet. Perhaps it may never be
+seen. I thought, not long ago, that we might have
+to undertake a terrible risk in escaping from this
+place. I directed you to go to the storeroom—but
+there, I can’t say any more, my friends. Sufficient
+that I had nothing in the animal line concealed
+there.”</p>
+
+<p>“But I am certain there was some beast or
+human being in there,” insisted Mark. “I heard
+curious noises in there. Besides, how do you account
+for the food disappearing and the door
+being open at times?”</p>
+
+<p>“It might have been rats,” said Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“I don’t believe there are rats in the ship,” put
+in the professor. “More likely it was one of us
+who got up hungry and took the victuals.”</p>
+
+<p>“I’m sorry I can’t agree with you,” Mark
+added respectfully. “I am sure some strange
+being was on board this ship, and I believe it has
+now escaped. Who or what it was I can’t say,
+but you’ll find I’m right, some day.”</p>
+
+<p>“All right,” spoke Mr. Henderson with a
+laugh. “I like to see any one brave enough to
+stick up for his opinion, but, at the same time, I
+can’t very well imagine any person or thing being
+concealed in that storeroom ever since we started.
+How could it get in?”</p>
+
+<p>Mark did not answer, but there came to him
+the recollection of that night, previous to the sailing
+of the <em>Flying Mermaid</em>, when he had observed
+some strange shadow that seemed to glide aboard
+the craft.</p>
+
+<p>“Now let’s forget all about such things,” the
+professor went on. “We are in a strange country,
+and there are many things to see and do. Let’s
+explore a little. Then we must see what we can
+do with the ship. We are dependent on it, and
+it will not do to allow it to remain in a damaged
+state. We expect to travel many miles in the
+interior of the earth if it is possible, and we have
+only our craft to go in.”</p>
+
+<p>“I reckon we’d all better assimilate into our
+interior progression some molecules and atoms of
+partly disentegrated matter in order to supply combustion
+for the carbonaceous elements and assist
+in the manufacture of red corpuscles,” said Washington,
+appearing in the door, with a broad grin
+on his good-natured face.</p>
+
+<p>“Which, being interpreted,” the professor said,
+“means, I suppose, that we had better eat something
+to keep our digestive apparatus in good
+working order?”</p>
+
+<p>“Yo’ done guessed it!” exclaimed the colored
+man, relapsing into his ordinary speech. “I’se
+got a meal all ready.”</p>
+
+<p>They agreed that they might not have another
+opportunity soon to partake of food, so they all
+gathered about the table, on which Washington
+had spread a good meal.</p>
+
+<p>“Come on, let’s go outside and view this new
+and strange land at closer quarters,” the professor
+said, when they had satisfied their appetites.
+“We can’t see much from inside the ship.”</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly the heavy door in the side of the
+<em>Mermaid</em> was slid back, and, for the first time
+the travelers stepped out on the surface of the
+land in the interior of the earth.</p>
+
+<p>At first it seemed no different than the ordinary
+land to which they were accustomed. But they
+soon found it had many strange attributes. The
+queer shifting and changing light, with the myriad
+of hues was one of them, but to this the adventurers
+had, by this time, become accustomed,
+though it was, none the less, a marvel to them.
+It was odd enough to see the landscape blood
+red one instant, and a pale green the next, as it
+does when you look through differently colored
+glasses.</p>
+
+<p>Then, too, they noticed that the grass and
+flowers grew much more abundantly than in the
+outer part of the world. They saw clover six feet
+high, and blades of grass even taller. In some
+places the growth of grass was so big that they
+were in danger of getting lost in it.</p>
+
+<p>“If the grass is like this, what will the trees
+be?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“There are some away over there,” Jack replied.
+“We’ll have to take a sail over. They
+must be several hundred feet high.”</p>
+
+<p>“Well, at any rate, here’s a little brook, and
+the water looks good to drink,” went on Mark.
+“I’m thirsty, so here goes.”</p>
+
+<p>He hurried to where a stream was flowing sluggishly
+between grassy banks. The water was as
+clear as crystal, and Mark got down on his face
+and prepared to sip some of the liquid up.</p>
+
+<p>But, no sooner had his lips touched it, than he
+sprang up with a cry and stood gazing at the
+water.</p>
+
+<p>“What’s the matter?” asked Jack. “Hot?”</p>
+
+<p>“No, it isn’t hot,” Mark replied, “but it isn’t
+water. It’s white molasses!”</p>
+
+<p>“White molasses?” repeated the professor,
+coming up at that moment. “What are you talking
+about?”</p>
+
+<p>He stooped down and dipped his finger into
+the stream. He drew it up quickly, and there ran
+from it big drops that flowed as slowly as the
+extract of the sugarcane does in cold weather.</p>
+
+<p>“You’re about right, Mark,” he said. “It’s
+water but it’s almost as thick as molasses.” He
+touched his finger to his tongue. “It’s good to
+drink, all right,” he went on, “only it will be a
+little slow going down.”</p>
+
+<p>Then he dipped up a palm full, and let it
+trickle down his throat.</p>
+
+<p>“It is the strangest water I ever saw,” he
+added. “It must be that the lack of some peculiar
+property of air, which we have on the surface,
+has caused this. I must make some notes on it,”
+and he drew out pencil and paper. He was about
+to jot down some facts when he was interrupted
+by a cry from Washington.</p>
+
+<p>“Come and see what’s the matter with this
+stone!” he cried.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch18' class='c008'>CHAPTER XVIII<br /><br />CAUGHT BY A STRANGE PLANT</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>“Washington is in trouble!” exclaimed Mr.
+Henderson. Followed by the two boys he ran
+to where the colored man stood in a stooping
+position over a small pile of stones.</p>
+
+<p>“What is it? Has something bit you?” asked
+the scientist, as he came up on the run.</p>
+
+<p>“No, but I can’t git this stone up!” Washington
+said. “Look at what a little stone it is, but
+I can’t lift it. Something must have happened to
+me. Maybe some one put th’ evil eye on me!
+Maybe I’m bewitched!”</p>
+
+<p>“Nonsense!” exclaimed the professor, “what
+did you want the stone for?”</p>
+
+<p>“Nothin’ in particular,” replied Washington,
+still tugging away at the stone, which was the size
+of his head. “I was just goin’ t’ throw it at a
+big bird, but when I went to lift it this little
+stone 'peared t’ be glued fast.”</p>
+
+<p>Washington moved aside to give Mr. Henderson
+a chance to try to pick up the piece of rock.
+As the scientist grasped it a look of surprise came
+over his features:</p>
+
+<p>“This is most remarkable!” he exclaimed.
+“I can’t budge it. I wonder if a giant magnet
+is holding it down.”</p>
+
+<p>He tugged and tugged until he was red in the
+face. Then he beckoned to the two boys, and
+they came to his aid. There was barely room
+for them all to each get one hand on the rock,
+and then, only after a powerful tug did it come
+up. Almost instantly it dropped back to the earth.</p>
+
+<p>“This is remarkable!” the professor said. “I
+wonder if the other stones are the same.”</p>
+
+<p>He tried several others, and one and all resisted
+his efforts. It was only the small stones he
+was able to lift alone, and these, he said, were
+so weighty that it would have been a task to
+throw them any distance.</p>
+
+<p>“The water and the stones are strangely heavy
+in this land,” he said. “I wonder what other
+queer things we shall see.”</p>
+
+<p>“I saw a bird a little while ago, when I went
+to pick up that stone,” observed Washington.</p>
+
+<p>“What kind was it?” asked the inventor.</p>
+
+<p>“I don’t know, only it was about as big as an
+eagle.”</p>
+
+<p>The travelers wandered about a quarter of a
+mile from the ship. They avoided the tall grass
+and the lofty nodding flowers that seemed to grow
+in regular groves, and kept to places where they
+could walk with comparative freedom.</p>
+
+<p>“Have you formed any idea, Professor, as to
+the nature of this country?” asked Mark, who
+liked to get at the bottom of things.</p>
+
+<p>“I have, but it is only a theory,” Mr. Henderson
+answered. “I believe we are on a sort of
+small earth that is inside the larger one we live on.
+This sphere floats in space, just as our earth does
+and we have passed through the void that lies
+between our globe and this interior one. I think
+this new earth is about a quarter the size of ours
+and in some respects the same. In others it is
+vastly different.</p>
+
+<p>“But we will not think of those things now.
+We must see what our situation is, whether we
+are in any danger, and must look to repairing our
+ship. There will be time enough for other matters
+later.”</p>
+
+<p>The travelers were walking slowly along, noting
+the strange things on every side. As they advanced
+the vegetation seemed to become more
+luxuriant, as if nature had tried to out-do herself
+in providing beautiful flowers and plants. The
+changing lights added to the beauty and weirdness
+of the scene.</p>
+
+<p>The plain was a rolling one, and here and there
+were small hills and hollows. As the travelers
+topped a rise Jack, who was in advance, called out:</p>
+
+<p>“Oh what queer plants! They are giant Jacks-in-the-pulpit!”</p>
+
+<p>The others hastened forward to see what the
+boy had discovered. Jack was too eager to wait,
+and pressed on. The hill which sloped away from
+the top of the little plateau on which he stood,
+was steeper than he had counted on. As he leaned
+forward he lost his balance and toppled, head
+foremost, down the declivity, rolling over.</p>
+
+<p>“Look out!” cried Mark, who had almost
+reached his comrade’s side.</p>
+
+<p>The scene that confronted the travelers was a
+strange one. Before them in a sort of hollow,
+were scores of big plants, shaped somewhat like
+a Jack-in-the-pulpit, or a big lily, with a curved
+top or flap to it.</p>
+
+<p>The plants were about eight feet tall, three feet
+across the top, and the flap or covering was raised
+about two feet. They were nodding and swaying
+in the wind on their short stems.</p>
+
+<p>“He’s headed right for one of them!” Mr.
+Henderson exclaimed. “I hope he’ll not fall into
+one of the openings.”</p>
+
+<p>“Is there any danger?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“I’m afraid there is,” the inventor added.
+“Those plants are a variety of the well-known
+pitcher plant, or fly-trap, as they are sometimes
+called. In tropical countries they grow to a large
+size, but nothing like these. They are filled, in
+the cup, with a sort of sticky, sweet mixture, and
+this attracts insects. When one enters the cup the
+top flap folds over, and the hapless insect is caught
+there. The plant actually devours it, nature providing
+a sort of vegetable digestive apparatus.
+These giant plants are the same, and they seem
+large enough to take in a man, to say nothing of
+Jack!”</p>
+
+<p>With anxious faces the adventurers turned to
+watch the fate of their comrade. Jack was slipping,
+sliding and rolling down the hill. He could
+not seem to stop, though he was making desperate
+efforts to do so. He was headed straight for one
+of the largest of the terrible plants.</p>
+
+<p>In vain, as he saw what was in front of him,
+did he try to change the course of his involuntary
+voyage. Over and over he rolled, until, at length,
+he struck a little grassy hummock, bounced into
+the air, and right into the opening of a monster
+pitcher plant.</p>
+
+<p>“It has him!” cried Mark. “We must save
+him! Come on everyone!”</p>
+
+<p>He raced down the hill, while the others came
+closely after him. They reached the plant into
+which Jack had bounced. The flap, or top piece,
+had closed down, tightly over the unfortunate boy.</p>
+
+<p>“Quick! We must save him or he will be
+smothered to death or drowned in the liquid the
+cup contains!” Mr. Henderson exclaimed.
+“Attack the plant with anything you can find!”</p>
+
+<p>“Let’s cut through the side of the flower-cup!”
+suggested Mark. “That seems softer than the
+stem.”</p>
+
+<p>His idea was quickly put into operation.
+Andy’s long hunting knife came in very handy.
+While the sides of the long natural cup were
+tough, the knife made an impression on them, and,
+soon, a small door or opening had been cut in
+the side of the pitcher plant, large enough to
+enable a human body to pass through.</p>
+
+<p>When the last fibre had been severed by Andy,
+who was chosen to wield the knife because of his
+long practice as a hunter, there was a sudden commotion
+within the plant. Then a dark object,
+dripping water, made a spring and landed almost
+at the feet of the professor.</p>
+
+<p>It was Jack, and a sorry sight he presented.
+He was covered from head to foot with some
+sticky substance, which dripped from all over him.</p>
+
+<p>With hasty movements he cleared the stuff from
+his eyes and mouth, and spluttered:</p>
+
+<p>“It’s a good thing you cut me out when you
+did. I couldn’t have held on much longer!”</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch19' class='c008'>CHAPTER XIX<br /><br />THE BIG PEACH</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>Jack soon recovered from his remarkable experience.
+The terrible plant that had nearly eaten
+him alive was a mass of cut-up vegetable matter
+which attracted a swarm of insects. Most of
+them were ants, but such large ones the boys had
+never seen before, and the professor said they exceeded
+in size anything he had read about. Some
+of them were as large as big rats. They bit off
+large pieces of the fallen plant and carried them
+to holes in the ground which were big enough for
+Washington to slip his foot into, and he wore a No. 11 shoe.</p>
+
+<p>But the adventurers felt there were more important
+things for them to look at than ants, so
+they started away again, the professor telling them
+all to be careful and avoid accidents.</p>
+
+<p>It was while they were strolling through a little
+glade, which they came upon unexpectedly, that
+Washington, who was in the lead called out:</p>
+
+<p>“Gracious goodness! It must be Thanksgivin’!”</p>
+
+<p>“Why so?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“'Cause here’s th’ remarkablest extraordinary
+and expansionist of a pumpkin that ever I laid
+eyes on!” the colored man cried.</p>
+
+<p>They all hurried to where Washington had come
+to a halt. There, on the ground in front of him,
+was a big round object, about the size of a hogshead.
+It was yellow in color, and was not unlike
+the golden vegetable from which mothers make
+such delicious pies.</p>
+
+<p>“I allers was fond of pumpkins,” said Washington,
+placing his hand on the thing, which was
+almost as tall as he was, “but I never thought
+I’d come across such a one as this.”</p>
+
+<p>The professor and the two boys went closer
+to the monstrosity. Mr. Henderson passed his
+hand over it and then, bending closer, smelled of
+it.</p>
+
+<p>“That’s not a pumpkin!” he exclaimed.</p>
+
+<p>“What is it then?” asked Washington.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s a giant peach,” the inventor remarked.
+“Can’t you see the fuzz, and smell it? Of course
+it’s a peach.”</p>
+
+<p>“Well I’ll be horn-swoggled!” cried Washington,
+leaning against the big fruit, which easily supported
+him.</p>
+
+<p>“Hurrah!” cried Jack, drawing his knife from
+his pocket and opening the largest blade. “I
+always did like peaches. Now I can have all I
+want,” and he drove the steel into the object, cutting
+off a big slice which he began to eat.</p>
+
+<p>“It may be poisonous!” exclaimed Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Too late now,” responded Jack, the juice running
+down from his mouth. “Taste’s good, anyhow.”</p>
+
+<p>They all watched Jack while he devoured his
+slice of fruit. Washington acted as if he expected
+his friend to topple over unconscious, but
+Jack showed no bad symptoms.</p>
+
+<p>“You’d better all have some,” the boy said.
+“It’s the best I ever tasted.”</p>
+
+<p>Encouraged by Jack’s example, Mark thought
+he, too, would have some of the fruit. He opened
+his knife and was about to take off some of the
+peach when suddenly the thing began to roll forward,
+almost upon him.</p>
+
+<p>“Hi! Stop your shoving!” he exclaimed.
+“Do you want to have the thing roll over me,
+Jack?”</p>
+
+<p>“I’m not shoving!” replied Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“Some one is!” Mark went on. He dodged
+around the far side of the immense fruit and what
+he saw made him cry out in astonishment.</p>
+
+<p>Two grasshoppers, each one standing about
+three feet high, were standing on their hind legs,
+and with their fore feet were pushing the peach
+along the ground. They had been attracted to
+the fruit by some juice which escaped from a bruise
+on that side, which was the ripest, and, being fond
+of sweets had, evidently decided to take their find
+to some safe place where they could eat it at their
+leisure. Or perhaps they wanted to provide for
+their families if grasshoppers have them.</p>
+
+<p>“Did you ever see such monsters?” asked Jack.
+“They’re as big as dogs!”</p>
+
+<p>At the sound of his voice the two grasshoppers,
+becoming alarmed, ceased their endeavors to roll
+the peach along, and, assuming a crouching attitude
+seemed to be waiting.</p>
+
+<p>“They certainly are remarkable specimens,”
+Mr. Henderson said. “If the other animals
+are in proportion, and if there are persons in
+this new world, we are likely to have a hard time
+of it.”</p>
+
+<p>This time the immense insects concluded the
+strangers were not to their liking. With a snapping
+of their big muscular legs and a whirr of
+their wings that was like the starting of an automobile,
+the grasshoppers rose into the air and
+sailed away over the heads of the adventurers.
+Their flight was more than an eighth of a mile in
+extent, and they came down in a patch of the very
+tall grass.</p>
+
+<p>“Let’s go after them!” exclaimed old Andy.
+“I was so excited I forgot to take a shot at them.
+Come on!”</p>
+
+<p>“I think we’d better not,” counseled the professor.
+“In the first place we don’t need them.
+They would be no good for food. Then we
+don’t know but what they might attack us, and
+it would be no joke to be bitten by a grasshopper
+of that size. Let them alone. We may find
+other game which will need your attention, Andy.
+Better save your ammunition.”</p>
+
+<p>Somewhat against his will, Andy had to submit
+to the professor’s ruling. The old hunter consoled
+himself with the reflection that if insects
+grew to that size he would have some excellent
+sport hunting even the birds of the inner world.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder what sort of a tree that peach grew
+on,” Jack remarked, as he cut off another slice,
+when the excitement caused by the discovery of the
+grasshoppers had subsided. “It must be taller
+than a church steeple. I wonder how the fruit
+got here, for there are no trees around.”</p>
+
+<p>“I fancy those insects rolled it along for a
+good distance,” Mr. Henderson put in. “You
+can see the marks on the ground, where they pushed
+it. They are wonderful creatures.”</p>
+
+<p>“Are we going any farther?” asked Mark.
+“Perhaps we can find the peach tree, and, likely
+there are other fruit trees near it.”</p>
+
+<p>At the professor’s suggestion they strolled along
+for some distance. They were now about three
+miles from the airship, and found that what they
+had supposed was a rather level plain, was becoming
+a succession of hills and hollows. It was while
+descending into a rather deep valley that Jack
+pointed ahead and exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>“I guess there’s our peach orchard, but I never
+saw one like it before.”</p>
+
+<p>Nor had any of the others. Instead of trees
+the peaches were attached to vines growing along
+the ground. They covered a large part of the valley,
+and the peaches, some bigger than the one they
+first discovered, some small and green, rose up
+amid the vines, just as pumpkins do in a corn field.</p>
+
+<p>“Stranger and stranger,” the professor murmured.
+“Peaches grow on vines. I suppose potatoes
+will grow on trees. Everything seems to be
+reversed here.”</p>
+
+<p>They made their way down toward the peach
+“orchard” as Jack called it, though “patch”
+would have been a better name. Besides peaches
+they found plums, apples, and pears growing in the
+same way, and all of a size proportionate to the
+first-named fruit.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, one thing is evident,” Mr. Henderson
+remarked, “we shall not starve here. There is
+plenty to eat, even, if we have to turn vegetarians.”</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder what time it is getting to be,” Jack
+remarked. “My watch says twelve o’clock but
+whether it’s noon or midnight I can’t tell, with this
+colored light coming and going. I wonder if it
+ever sets as the sun does.”</p>
+
+<p>“That is something we’ll have to get used to,”
+the professor said. “But I think we had better
+go back to the ship now. We have many things
+to do to get it in order again. Besides, I am a
+little afraid to leave it unguarded so long. No
+telling but what some strange beast—or persons,
+for that matter—might injure it.”</p>
+
+<p>“I’m going to take back some slices of peaches
+with me, anyhow,” Mark said, and he and Jack
+cut off enough to make several meals, while Bill,
+Tom and Washington took along all they could
+carry.</p>
+
+<p>As they walked back toward the ship the strange
+lights seemed to be dying out. At first they
+hardly noticed this, but as they continued on it
+became quite gloomy, and an odd sort of gloom
+it was too, first green, then yellow, then red and
+then blue.</p>
+
+<p>“I believe whatever serves as a sun down here
+is setting,” the professor observed. “We must
+hurry. I don’t want to be caught out here after
+dark.”</p>
+
+<p>They hurried on, the lights dying out more and
+more, until, as they came in sight of their ship,
+it was so black they could hardly see.</p>
+
+<p>Mark who was in the rear turned around, glancing
+behind him. As he did so he caught sight of
+a gigantic shadow moving along on top of the nearest
+hill. The shadow was not unlike that of a
+man in shape, but of such gigantic stature that
+Mark knew it could be like no human being he had
+ever seen. At the same time it bore a curious resemblance
+to the weird shadow he had seen slip
+into the <em>Mermaid</em> that night before they sailed.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder if it can be the same—the same
+thing—grown larger, just as the peach grows
+larger than those in our world,” Mark thought,
+while a shiver of fear seemed to go over him. “I
+wonder if that—that thing could have been on
+the ship——”</p>
+
+<p>Then the last rays of light died away and there
+was total darkness.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch20' class='c008'>CHAPTER XX<br /><br />OVERHAULING THE SHIP</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>“Keep together!” shouted the professor. “It
+will not do to become lost now. We are close to
+the ship, and will soon be there. Come after
+me.”</p>
+
+<p>It was more by following the sound of the scientist’s
+voice, than by any sight which the others
+could get of him, that they managed to trail along
+behind. They reached the ship in safety, however,
+and entered. There was no sound as of
+beasts or insects within, and, though Mark felt
+a little apprehensive on account of what he had
+seen, he and the others as well, were glad to be
+again in something that seemed like home.</p>
+
+<p>“I wish we had some candles, or some sort of
+a light to see by,” the professor remarked. “We
+can do nothing in the dark, and there is no telling
+how long this night is going to last once it has set
+in. If I could have a little illumination, I might
+be able to fix the dynamo, and then we could turn
+on the incandescents. That portable light we had
+is broken.”</p>
+
+<p>“By cracky!” exclaimed Andy. “I believe I
+have the very thing!”</p>
+
+<p>“You don’t mean to say you have a torch or a
+candle with you, do you?” asked Mr. Henderson.</p>
+
+<p>“No, but I have my patent pipe lighting apparatus,”
+the hunter said. “I always carry it. It
+gives a little light, but not much, though it may
+be enough to work by.”</p>
+
+<p>Not until after several hours work, handicapped
+as they were by lack of light, were the repairs
+to the ship completed.</p>
+
+<p>“Now we’ll start the engine and see how we
+will come out,” the inventor exclaimed, as he wiped
+his hands on some waste.</p>
+
+<p>It did not take long to generate enough power
+to turn the dynamo. Soon the familiar hum and
+whirr was heard, and, a few seconds later the filaments
+in the lamps began to glow a dull red, which
+gradually brightened until they were shining in all
+their usual brilliancy.</p>
+
+<p>“Hurrah!” cried the boys. “Now we can
+see!”</p>
+
+<p>They all felt in better spirits with the restoration
+of the lights, and, washing off the grease and
+dirt of their labors in the engine room, they prepared
+to sit down to the meal which Washington
+prepared.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the dynamo was working well, care
+had to be taken not to speed it too much on account
+of a mended belt. The professor turned off part
+of the lights and switched some of the current into
+the storage batteries, to provide for emergencies.
+For there was no telling how long the night might
+last.</p>
+
+<p>Jack was the first one to finish the meal—they
+did not know whether to call it dinner, supper or
+breakfast. He went into the conning tower, and,
+as soon as he reached it he called out:</p>
+
+<p>“Come on up here, professor! There’s something
+strange going on!”</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Henderson, followed by Mark, hurried to
+the tower. As he reached it and looked out of the
+forward window, a beautiful white glow illuminated
+the whole scene, and then, from below the
+horizon, there arose seven luminous disks. One
+was in the centre, while about it circled the other
+six, like some immense pin-wheel.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s the moon!” cried Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s seven moons!” Jack exclaimed. “Why
+it’s almost as light as day!”</p>
+
+<p>And so it was, for the seven moons, if that is
+what they were, gave an illumination not unlike
+the sun in brilliancy though it was like the beams
+from the pale moon of the earth.</p>
+
+<p>“I guess we need not have worried about the
+darkness,” the professor remarked. “Still it is a
+good thing I fixed the dynamo.”</p>
+
+<p>For some time he and the other adventurers
+watched the odd sight of the moons, as they rose
+higher and higher overhead. The scene was a
+beautiful, if weird one, for the whole plain was
+bathed in the soft light.</p>
+
+<p>“I guess we can turn off the incandescents, and
+use all the power for the storage batteries,” Mr.
+Henderson went on, as he descended into the ship,
+and opened the port shutters which had been closed
+when they started off on their exploring tour.
+The interior of the <em>Mermaid</em> was almost as light
+as when the odd colored beams had been playing
+over the new earth to which they had come.</p>
+
+<p>“I think we had better continue with our work
+of making repairs,” Mr. Henderson said. “We
+can’t count on these moons remaining here any
+length of time, and I want to take advantage of
+them. So though some of us perhaps need sleep,
+we will forego it and fix up the <em>Mermaid</em>. I want
+to take a trip and see what other wonders await
+us.”</p>
+
+<p>They all agreed that they would rather work
+than sleep, and soon the entire force was busy in
+the engine room. There was much to be done,
+and the most important things were attended to
+first. The motive power was overhauled and
+found to be in need of several new parts. These
+were put in and then the gas generator, and the
+negative gravity machine, were put in shape.</p>
+
+<p>It would have taken something very substantial
+to have awakened any one on board the <em>Mermaid</em>
+that night. They all slept soundly and awoke to
+find the strange colored lights shining in through
+the glass covered port holes.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, the sun, or what corresponds to it, is
+up,” observed Jack, “and I guess we had better
+do as the little boy in the school reader did, and
+get up, too, Mark.”</p>
+
+<p>Soon all the travelers were aroused, and the
+sound of Washington bustling about in the kitchen,
+whence came the smell of coffee, bacon and eggs,
+told the hungry ones that breakfast was under way.</p>
+
+<p>After the meal work was again started on repairing
+the ship, and by noon the professor remarked:</p>
+
+<p>“I think we shall try a little flight after dinner.
+That is, if one thing doesn’t prevent us.”</p>
+
+<p>“What is that?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“We may be held down, as were those stones,” was the grave answer.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch21' class='c008'>CHAPTER XXI<br /><br />THE FISH THAT WALKED</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>It was with no little apprehension that the professor
+prepared to take his first flight aboard the
+ship in the realms of the new world. He knew
+little or nothing of the conditions he might meet
+with, the density of the atmosphere, or how the
+<em>Mermaid</em> would behave under another environment
+than that to which she was accustomed.</p>
+
+<p>Yet he felt it was necessary to make a start.
+They would have to attempt a flight sooner or
+later, and Mr. Henderson was not the one to delay
+matters. So, the last adjustment having been
+made to the repaired machinery, they all took their
+places in the ship.</p>
+
+<p>The boys and the professor went to the conning
+tower to direct matters, while Washington
+and the others were in the engine room to see that
+the machinery worked properly. Mark gave a
+last look outside as he closed the big steel cover
+over the hole through which admission was had to
+the craft. He thought he might catch a glimpse
+of the queer shadow, but nothing was in sight. It
+was like a beautiful summer’s day, save for the
+strange lights, shifting and changing. But the
+travelers had become somewhat used to them by
+this time.</p>
+
+<p>The professor turned the valve that allowed the
+gas to enter the holder. There was a hissing
+sound and a sort of trembling throughout the entire
+ship. The dynamos were whizzing away and
+the negative gravity machine was all ready to start.</p>
+
+<p>For several minutes the travelers waited until
+the big lifting tank was filled with the strong vapor.
+They watched the gages which indicated the
+pressure to be several hundred pounds.</p>
+
+<p>“I think we can chance it now,” remarked Mr.
+Henderson, as he threw over several levers.
+“We’ll try, at any rate.”</p>
+
+<p>With a tremor the <em>Mermaid</em> left the surface of
+the inner earth and went sailing upward toward
+the—well it wasn’t exactly the sky, but it was
+what corresponded to it in the new world, though
+there were no clouds and no blue depths such as
+the boys were used to. At all events the <em>Mermaid</em>
+was flying again, and, as the adventurers felt themselves
+being lifted up they gave a spontaneous
+cheer at the success which had crowned their efforts.</p>
+
+<p>The ship went up several hundred feet, and
+then, the professor, having brought her to a stop,
+sent her ahead at a slow pace. He wanted to be
+sure all the apparatus was in good working order
+before he tried any speed.</p>
+
+<p>The <em>Mermaid</em> responded readily. Straight as
+an arrow through the air she flew.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, this is almost as good as being on the
+regular earth!” exclaimed Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s better,” put in Mark. “We haven’t seen
+half the wonders yet. Let’s open the floor shutter,
+and see how it looks down below.”</p>
+
+<p>He and Jack went to the room where there was
+an opening in the floor of the ship, covered by
+heavy glass. They slid back the steel shutter and
+there, down below them, was the strange new
+world they had come to, stretched out like some
+big map.</p>
+
+<p>They could see mountains, forests, plains, and
+rivers, the water sparkling in the colored light.
+Over green fields they flew, then across some
+stretches where only sand and rocks were to be seen.
+Faster and faster the ship went, as the professor
+found the machinery was once more in perfect
+order. Jack was idly watching the play of tinted
+lights over the surface of the ground.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder what makes it,” he said.</p>
+
+<p>“I have tried to account for it in several ways,”
+said the professor, who had called Washington to
+the conning tower and come to join the boys. “I
+have had first one theory and then another, but the
+one I am almost sure is correct is that hidden volcanic
+fires cause the illumination.</p>
+
+<p>“I think they flare up and die away, and have
+become so regular that they produce the same
+effect as night and day with us. Probably the
+fires go out for lack of fuel, and when it is supplied
+they start up again. Perhaps it is a sort of
+gas that they burn.”</p>
+
+<p>“Well, it’s queer enough, whatever it is,” Jack
+remarked. “What strikes me as funny, though,
+is that we haven’t seen a single person since we
+came here. Surely this place must be inhabited.”</p>
+
+<p>Mark thought of the strange shadow he had
+seen, but said nothing.</p>
+
+<p>“I believe it is,” the professor answered.
+“We will probably come upon the inhabitants
+soon. I only hope they are a people who will do
+us no harm.”</p>
+
+<p>“If they tried any of their tricks we could
+mount up in our ship and escape them,” said Andy.</p>
+
+<p>“Provided they gave us the chance,” Mr.
+Henderson put in. “Well, we’ll not worry about
+that now.”</p>
+
+<p>For several hours the ship traveled on, until it
+had come to a different sort of country. It was
+wilder and not so level, and there were a number
+of streams and small lakes to be seen.</p>
+
+<p>“Are you going to sail all night?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“No,” replied the professor. “I think we’ll
+descend very soon now, and camp out for a while.
+That lake just ahead seems to offer a good
+place,” and he pointed to a large sheet of water
+that sparkled in the distance, for by this time they
+had all gone back to the conning tower.</p>
+
+<p>The lake was in the midst of a wood that extended
+for some distance on all sides, and was
+down in a sort of valley. The ship headed toward
+it, and in a short time a landing was made
+close to shore.</p>
+
+<p>“Maybe we can have some fresh fish for supper,”
+exclaimed Jack as he ran from the ship as
+soon as the sliding door in the side was opened.
+“Looks as if that lake had some in it. It is not
+thick water like in that stream we stopped at,” he
+added.</p>
+
+<p>“I believe you’re right,” old Andy put in, as
+he turned back to look for some lines and hooks
+among his traps. He soon found what he wanted,
+and gave them to the boys, taking his trusty gun
+along for himself.</p>
+
+<p>While the professor, Washington, Tom and
+Bill remained behind to make some adjustments to
+the machinery, and to get things in shape for the
+night, which, they calculated would soon be upon
+them, Jack, Mark and Andy went down to the
+shore of the lake. The boys cut some poles from
+the trees, and baiting the hooks with some fat
+worms found under the bark, threw in.</p>
+
+<p>“Let’s see who’ll get the first bite,” spoke Jack.
+“I’m pretty generally lucky at fishing.”</p>
+
+<p>“Well, while you’re waiting to decide that there
+contest, I think I’ll take a stroll along shore and
+see if I can see anything to shoot,” Andy remarked.</p>
+
+<p>For several minutes the boys sat in silence on
+the bank of the lake, watching the play of the
+vari-colored lights on the water. Suddenly Jack
+felt a quiver on his line, and his pole began to
+shake.</p>
+
+<p>“I’ve got something!” he cried. Then his
+pole bent almost double and he began to pull for
+all he was worth. “It’s a whopper!” he cried.
+“Come and help me, Mark!”</p>
+
+<p>Mark ran to his friend’s aid. Whatever was
+on the other end of the line was strong enough to
+tax the muscles of both boys. They could hear
+the pole beginning to break. But for the excellent
+quality of Andy’s line that would have parted
+some time before.</p>
+
+<p>All at once there came a sudden slacking of the
+pull from whatever was in the water. And so
+quickly did it cease that both boys went over backward
+in a heap.</p>
+
+<p>“He’s got away!” cried Jack, getting up and
+brushing some of the dirt from his clothes.</p>
+
+<p>“There’s something that didn’t get away!”
+cried Mark, who had risen to his knees, and was
+pointing at the lake. Jack looked and what he
+saw made him almost believe he was dreaming.</p>
+
+<p>For, emerging from the water, dragging the
+pole and line the boys had dropped along with it,
+was a most curious creature. It was a big fish,
+but a fish with four short legs on which it was
+walking, or rather waddling along as much as a
+duck, with a double supply of feet, might do.</p>
+
+<p>“Say, do I see that or is there something the
+matter with my eyes?” sung out Jack, making
+ready to run away.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s there all right!” exclaimed Mark. “Hi!
+Andy! Here’s something to shoot!” he yelled,
+for indeed the creature was big enough to warrant
+attack with a gun. It was about five feet long and
+two feet through.</p>
+
+<p>On and on it came, straight at the boys, as if
+to have revenge for the pain the fish hook must
+have caused it, for the barb could be seen dangling
+from its lip. On and on it came, waddling forward,
+the water dripping from it at every step.
+It had the body and general shape of a fish, save
+that the tail was rather large in proportion. As
+it came nearer the boys noted that the feet were
+webbed, like those of a water fowl.</p>
+
+<p>“Come on!” cried Jack. “It may attack
+us!”</p>
+
+<p>At that moment the creature opened its mouth,
+showing a triple row of formidable teeth, and gave
+utterance to a sort of groan and grunt combined.</p>
+
+<p>This was enough to send Jack and Mark off on
+a run up the bank, and did they stop until they
+heard Andy’s voice hailing them.</p>
+
+<p>“What’s the matter, boys?”</p>
+
+<p>“Come here! Quick!” answered Jack.</p>
+
+<p>The fish-animal had halted and seemed to be
+taking an observation. To do this, as it could
+not turn its neck, it had to shift its whole body.
+Old Andy came up on the run, his gun held in
+readiness.</p>
+
+<p>“Where is it?” he asked, and the boys pointed
+silently.</p>
+
+<p>The hunter could not repress a start of astonishment
+as he saw the strange creature. But he
+did not hesitate a second. There was a crack of
+the rifle, and the thing, whatever it was, toppled
+over, dead.</p>
+
+<p>Andy hurried up to it, to get a closer view.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, this is the limit!” he exclaimed.
+“First we have grasshoppers that can roll peaches
+as big as hogsheads, and now we come across fish
+that walk. I wonder what we will see next.”</p>
+
+<p>“I don’t want to go fishing in this lake any
+more,” spoke Jack, as he looked at the repulsive
+creature. “I never want to eat fish any more.”</p>
+
+<p>“Same here,” agreed Mark, and old Andy was
+of the opinion that the thing killed would not make
+a wholesome dish for the table.</p>
+
+<p>“There don’t seem to be any game in this section,”
+he remarked. “Not a sign could I see, nor
+have I since we have been here, unless you count
+those grasshoppers. But the fruit is good, I’ll
+say that.”</p>
+
+<p>“Come on, we’d better be getting back,” Mark
+said, as he noticed it was getting dark. “I’m
+hungry.”</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch22' class='c008'>CHAPTER XXII<br /><br />THE SNAKE-TREE</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>They managed to make a good meal of the
+food supplies they had brought along, and as a
+dessert Washington made some peach short-cake
+from the slices of the giant fruit they had found
+the day before. Just as they finished supper it
+got very dark, but, in about an hour, the moonbeams,
+as the travelers called them, came up, and
+illuminated the lake with a weird light.</p>
+
+<p>As the machinery of the <em>Mermaid</em> was now in
+working order there was no further alarm because
+of the darkness. The ship rested on a level keel
+about a hundred yards back from the lake, and,
+seeing that all was snug, and the fastenings secure,
+the travelers went to bed.</p>
+
+<p>Though they had to forego fish for breakfast
+the travelers made a good meal. After seeing
+that the ship was in readiness for a quick start, the
+professor suggested they take a walk around and
+see what sort of country they might be in now.</p>
+
+<p>They tramped on for several miles, meeting
+with no adventures, and seeing nothing out of the
+ordinary. It was a pleasant day, just warm
+enough to be comfortable, and a little wind was
+blowing through the trees.</p>
+
+<p>“It would be almost like home if it wasn’t
+for the strange lights, and the memory of the
+queer things here,” said Jack. “I feel fine.
+Let’s see if you can hit that dead tree over there,
+Mark.”</p>
+
+<p>Jack stooped to grab up a stone, but no sooner
+had his fingers touched it than he called out:</p>
+
+<p>“There! I forgot all about the stones here
+being heavier than lead. Guess we can’t throw
+any of ’em. But come on. I’ll race you to the
+dead tree!”</p>
+
+<p>Mark was willing, so the two boys set off at a
+fast pace.</p>
+
+<p>“Look out where you’re going!” the professor
+called after them. “No telling what may be in
+those woods,” for the boys were approaching a
+little glade, on the edge of which the dead tree
+stood.</p>
+
+<p>Jack reached the goal first, and stood leaning
+against the trunk, waiting for Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“You’d better practice sprinting!” exclaimed
+the victor.</p>
+
+<p>Mark was about to excuse himself for his poor
+showing, on the plea of having eaten too much
+breakfast, when to his horror he saw what seemed
+to be a long thin snake spring out from the
+branches of a near-by tree and twine itself about
+Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“Help me! Save me!” cried the unfortunate
+boy, as he was lifted high into the air and pulled
+within the shadow of the wood.</p>
+
+<p>For an instant Mark was too horror-stricken to
+move. Then with a shout that alarmed the others,
+who were coming along more slowly, he made a
+dash for the place he had last seen Jack.</p>
+
+<p>Had old Andy not been on the watch, with
+those keen eyes of his, there might have been a
+double tragedy. He had seen from afar the sudden
+snatching up of Jack, and noted Mark’s rush
+to save his chum.</p>
+
+<p>“Stand still! Don’t go in there for your life!”
+yelled the hunter, at the same time running forward
+with gun ready.</p>
+
+<p>His example was followed by the professor,
+Washington and the other two men.</p>
+
+<p>“A snake has Jack!” called Mark, when Andy
+was at his side.</p>
+
+<p>“No! It’s not a snake!” replied the hunter.
+“It’s worse. It’s the snake-tree!”</p>
+
+<p>“What’s that?” asked Mr. Henderson, hurrying
+up.</p>
+
+<p>“The snake-tree has Jack,” the hunter went on.
+“It is a plant, half animal, half-vegetable. It
+has long branches, not unlike a snake in shape.
+They can move about and grab things.”</p>
+
+<p>“One of them got a grip on Jack as he leaned
+against the dead tree trunk. I just caught a
+glimpse of it, and called to prevent Mark from
+running into danger.”</p>
+
+<p>“Can’t we save him?” asked Mr. Henderson.</p>
+
+<p>“I’m going to try!” replied Andy. “Quick!
+Gather up some pieces of dry wood. I have some
+paper, and my pipe lighter. We must fight the
+snake-tree with fire!”</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch23' class='c008'>CHAPTER XXIII<br /><br />THE DESERTED VILLAGE</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>Jack’s cries were growing fainter and fainter.
+Peering in through the branches of the dead tree
+the professor could see the whip-like limbs winding
+closer and closer about the boy.</p>
+
+<p>“I am afraid we will be too late!” he said.</p>
+
+<p>Andy had twisted some paper into a rude torch.
+He set fire to it with his pocket lighter, and, when
+Bill and Mark brought him some little pieces of
+dead wood the old hunter added them to his bundle,
+which was now blazing brightly.</p>
+
+<p>“How are you going to do it?” asked the professor.</p>
+
+<p>“I’ll show you,” replied Andy. He bound the
+sticks and paper together with wisps of grass and
+then, when it was so hot he could hardly hold it
+longer, he ran as close as he dared to the snake-tree
+and tossed the torch at the foot of it.</p>
+
+<p>The blazing bundle fell among some damp
+leaves and grass, as Andy had intended it should,
+and soon a dense smoke arose, pouring straight
+up through the branches of the animal-tree, the
+limbs of which were gathered in a knot about the
+half-unconscious form of the boy.</p>
+
+<p>For a few minutes they all waited anxiously.
+Would Andy’s trick succeed? Had the terrible
+tree not already squeezed the life from Jack?</p>
+
+<p>But, while they watched, there seemed to come
+a change over the tree. The snake-like arms
+waved less and less. They seemed to straighten
+out, as though deprived of power by the smoke
+which was now so dense as to hide Jack from
+sight. Then the arms suddenly relaxed and something
+rolled from them and fell to the ground.
+With a quick movement Andy darted in, crawling
+on his hands and knees beneath the limbs, and
+brought Jack out. The boy was white and his
+eyes were closed.</p>
+
+<p>“Get some water!” cried the old hunter.</p>
+
+<p>Mark ran toward a stream a little distance away.
+He brought some of the curiously thick liquid in
+his hat, and while Andy held the boy the professor
+sprinkled some of the drops on his face, and forced
+some between his lips. In a little while Jack’s
+eyes slowly opened.</p>
+
+<p>“Don’t let it eat me!” he begged.</p>
+
+<p>“You’re all right now,” said Andy heartily.
+“Not a bit harmed, Jack. But,” he added in a low
+tone, “it was a close call.”</p>
+
+<p>A few whiffs from a bottle of ammonia the
+professor carried soon brought Jack’s color back.</p>
+
+<p>“Do you feel better now?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“I guess so. Yes, I’m all right,” replied Jack,
+struggling to his feet. “What happened? Feels
+as if I had been tied up with a lot of rope.”</p>
+
+<p>“That’s about what you were,” Andy replied,
+“only it was the worst kind of rope I ever saw.
+Those snake-trees are terrible things. I’ve read
+of ’em, but I never saw one before. The book
+that told of them says they squeeze their victims
+to death just as a snake does. The only way to do
+is to make some smoke and fire at the bottom.
+This sort of kills the branches or makes them
+stupid and they let go. The trees are half animal,
+and awful things. I hope we don’t meet with
+any more.”</p>
+
+<p>“Same here,” added Jack fervently, as he
+grasped Andy’s hand, and thanked him for saving
+his life.</p>
+
+<p>“Do you think you can go on, or shall we return
+to the ship?” the professor asked.</p>
+
+<p>“Oh I can trail along, if you move a little
+slowly,” Jack replied. “I’m a bit stiff, that’s all.”</p>
+
+<p>So they resumed their journey. They had
+gone, perhaps, three miles when Washington, who
+was in the lead, suddenly stopped and called:</p>
+
+<p>“Sounds like thunder.”</p>
+
+<p>The others listened. Sure enough there was a
+dull rumble and roar audible. It seemed off to
+the left, but they could see no clouds in the sky,
+nor any signs of a storm.</p>
+
+<p>“Let’s take a walk over that way and see what
+it is,” Mr. Henderson suggested.</p>
+
+<p>As they walked on the noise became louder, until
+in about half an hour it was like the sound from
+a blast furnace.</p>
+
+<p>“What do you suppose it can be?” asked
+Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Perhaps some new freak of nature,” the professor
+replied. “We seem to have a good many
+of them here.”</p>
+
+<p>They were all on their guard now, for there
+was no telling into what danger they might run.
+As they went up a little hill the noise became much
+louder. The professor and Andy, who had taken
+the lead, kept a sharp lookout ahead, that they
+might not unexpectedly fall into some hidden
+stream or lake. As they topped the hill they saw
+before them a deep valley, and in the midst of it
+was that which was causing the roaring sound.</p>
+
+<p>From the centre of an immense mound of rock
+and earth there spouted up a great column of
+water, three hundred feet or more, as straight as
+a flag staff. It was about ten feet in diameter,
+and at the top it broke into a rosette of sparkling
+liquid, which as the vari-colored lights played on
+it, resembled some wonderful flower.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s a great geyser!” the professor exclaimed.
+“We have come to a place like Yellowstone Park.
+We must be very careful. The crust may be very
+thin here, and let us down into some boiling
+spring.”</p>
+
+<p>The others gathered around the professor, and,
+from a safe distance watched the ever rising and
+falling shaft of water.</p>
+
+<p>It was not regular in motion. Sometimes it
+would shoot up to a great distance, nearly a thousand
+feet, the professor estimated. Again it
+would sink down, as the power sending it out lessened,
+until it was only a few hundred feet above
+the rounded top of the mound from which it
+spurted. But it never fell below this. All the
+while there was the constant roaring sound, as
+though the forces of nature below the surface were
+calling to be let out.</p>
+
+<p>“I hope there are not many of those about,”
+Mr. Henderson remarked after a pause. “If
+the ship should hit one during the night it would
+be all up with us. We must keep a careful lookout.”</p>
+
+<p>The spouting column had a fascination which
+held them to the spot for some time. From the
+hill they had a good view of the surrounding country,
+but did not see any more geysers.</p>
+
+<p>“Do you think it is hot water?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“There is no vapor,” the professor answered,
+“but most of the geysers are produced by the action
+of steam in the interior of the earth. However
+we’ll not take any chances by investigating.
+I fear it would not be safe to go into that valley.”</p>
+
+<p>“Look there!” cried Andy. “I guess we’re
+better off here!” He pointed a little to the right
+of where the water spouted. The others looked,
+and saw, coming from a hole in the ground, some
+shaggy black object.</p>
+
+<p>“What is it?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“It looks like a bear,” replied the hunter, “but
+I never saw one like it before.”</p>
+
+<p>Nor had any of the others, for the creature was
+a terrible one. It had the body of a bear, but
+the feet and legs were those of an alligator, while
+the tail trailed out behind like a snake, and the
+head had a long snout, not unlike the trunk of an
+elephant. The creature was about ten feet long
+and five feet in height.</p>
+
+<p>“Let me try a shot at it!” exclaimed Andy.
+“That is something worth shooting,” and he
+cocked his rifle.</p>
+
+<p>“Don’t!” exclaimed the professor shortly.
+“You might only wound it, and it would pursue
+us. We are not ready to fight such creatures as
+that, and you are the only one armed.”</p>
+
+<p>“I never missed anything I aimed at yet,” said
+Andy, a little hurt that any one should doubt his
+ability to kill at the first shot.</p>
+
+<p>“Perhaps not, but how do you know but what
+this creature has a bullet proof armor under its
+hide. This is a strange world, Andy. It is better
+to take no chances.”</p>
+
+<p>“I hate to see him get away,” the hunter said.</p>
+
+<p>But, as it happened, the beast was not to get
+away. As they watched they saw the horrible
+animal approach the mound from which the water
+spurted. Up the sides it climbed.</p>
+
+<p>“I guess he’s going to get a drink,” said Mark.</p>
+
+<p>That was evidently the beast’s intention. It
+went close to the spouting column of water, and
+thrust its head out so that its tongue could lap
+from the side. It seemed to have been in the
+habit of doing this.</p>
+
+<p>For once, and for the last time, however, it made
+a mistake. The water seemed to veer to one side.
+In its eagerness to get a drink the animal took another
+step forward. At that moment the direction
+of the column changed again, and it tilted over
+toward the beast.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly, as the travelers watched, the full
+force of the big column caught the beast just
+under the fore shoulders. Up into the air the creature
+shot, propelled by thousands of pounds pressure.
+Right up to the top of the column it went,
+and this time the water rose a thousand feet into
+the air.</p>
+
+<p>Up and up went the animal, struggling to get
+away from the remorseless grip. Then, when the
+water had reached its height, it shot the beast off
+to one side. Then the brute began to fall, twisting,
+turning, wiggling and struggling. Down it
+came with a thud that could be heard above the
+noise of the geyser.</p>
+
+<p>“I reckon that finishes him,” observed Andy.
+And it had, for there was not a sign of life from
+the creature.</p>
+
+<p>“I guess we have seen enough for one morning,”
+the professor said. “Let’s go back to the
+airship. It must be nearly dinner time.”</p>
+
+<p>They started away. Mark gave a last look
+at the queer column of water and the dead body
+of the strange animal. As he passed down the
+hill he thought he saw the creature move, and
+stayed to see if this was so. But a second glance
+convinced him he was mistaken.</p>
+
+<p>The others had gone on and were some distance
+ahead. Mark hurried on to join them. As he
+got a last glance at the top of the column, over
+the brow of the hill, he happened to look off to
+the left. There was another hill, about the size
+of the one they had been on.</p>
+
+<div class='c000'>
+<a href='images/illus-180f.jpg'><img src='images/illus-180.jpg' alt='' class='c012' /></a>
+<p class='c013'>UP IN THE AIR THE CREATURE SHOT</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>And, as Mark looked he saw something move.
+At first he thought it was another beast. But, to
+his terror he saw that the creature had only two
+legs, and that it stood upright like a man, but such
+a man as Mark had never seen before, for he was
+nearly twelve feet tall.</p>
+
+<p>He was about to cry out and warn the others,
+when the thing, whatever it was, sunk down, apparently
+behind some tall bushes, and disappeared
+as if the earth had opened and swallowed it.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder if I had better tell them,” thought
+Mark. “I can’t show them anything. I wonder
+if I really saw it, or if it was only a shadow. I
+guess I’ll say nothing. But it is very strange.”</p>
+
+<p>Then he hurried on to join the others.</p>
+
+<p>“What makes you so pale?” asked Jack of his
+chum.</p>
+
+<p>“Nothing,” said Mark, somewhat confused.
+“I guess I’m a little tired, that’s all.”</p>
+
+<p>They reached the ship in safety, and, having
+dinner started the machinery and took the <em>Mermaid</em>
+up into the air.</p>
+
+<p>“We’ll travel on and see if we can’t find some
+human beings,” the professor said.</p>
+
+<p>All that afternoon they sailed, the country below
+them unfolding like a panorama. They passed
+over big lakes, sailing on the surface of some, and
+over rivers, and vast stretches of forest and dreary
+plains. But they never saw a sign of human inhabitants.</p>
+
+<p>It was getting on to five o’clock, the hour when
+the brilliant lights usually disappeared, when Mark,
+who was steering in the conning tower, gave a cry.</p>
+
+<p>“What is it?” asked the professor, looking up
+from a rude map he was making of the land they
+had just traversed.</p>
+
+<p>“It looks like a town before us,” said the boy.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Henderson and Jack looked to where Mark
+pointed. A few miles ahead and below them were
+great mounds, not unlike that from which the geyser
+had spouted. But they were arranged in regular
+form, like houses on a street, row after row
+of them. And, as they approached nearer, they
+could see that the mounds had doors and windows
+to them. Some of the mounds were larger than
+others, and some were of double and triple formation.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s a city! The first city of the new
+world!” cried Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“It is a deserted village!” said the professor.
+“We have found where the people live, but we
+have not found them.” And he was right, for
+there was not a sign of life about the place, over
+which the airship was now suspended.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch24' class='c008'>CHAPTER XXIV<br /><br />THE GIANTS</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>“Let’s go down and investigate,” suggested
+Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“Better wait,” counseled the professor. “It
+will soon be dark, and, though we will have moonlight,
+we can not see to advantage. I think it
+will be best to keep the ship in the air to-night,
+and descend in the morning. Then we can look
+about and decide on what to do.”</p>
+
+<p>They all agreed this was the best plan, and,
+after making a circle above the deserted village,
+and noting no signs of life, the <em>Mermaid</em> was
+brought to a halt over the centre of the town, and
+about three hundred feet above it. There the
+travelers would be comparatively safe.</p>
+
+<p>It was deemed best to keep watch that night, and
+so, Mark, Jack, Bill and Tom took turns, though
+there was nothing for them to do, as not a thing
+happened. With the first appearance of dawn Mr.
+Henderson gave orders to have the ship lowered,
+and it came to rest in the middle of what corresponded
+to a street in the queer mound village.</p>
+
+<p>“Now to see what kind of people have lived
+here!” cried Jack. “They must have been a
+queer lot. Something like the Esquimaux, only
+they probably had more trouble keeping cool than
+the chaps up at the north pole do.”</p>
+
+<p>Now that they were down among the mound
+houses, they saw that the dwellings were much
+larger than they had supposed. They towered
+high above the boys’ heads, and some of them were
+large enough in area to have accommodated a company
+of soldiers.</p>
+
+<p>“Say, the chaps who lived in these must have
+been some pumpkins,” said Jack. “Why the ceilings
+are about fifteen feet high, and the doors almost
+the same! Talk about giants! I guess we’ve
+struck where they used to hang out, at any rate.”</p>
+
+<p>The houses were a curious mixture of clay and
+soft stone. There were doors, with big skins
+from animals as curtains, and the windows were
+devoid of glass. Instead of stairs there were rude
+ladders, and the furniture in the mound houses
+was of the roughest kind.</p>
+
+<p>There were fire-places in some of the houses,
+and the blackened and smoked walls showed that
+they must have been used. In one or two of the
+houses clay dishes, most of them broken, were
+scattered about, and the size of them, in keeping
+with everything else, indicated that those who
+used them were of no small stature.</p>
+
+<p>“Some of the bowls would do for bath tubs,”
+said Jack, as he came across one or two large
+ones.</p>
+
+<p>By this time the professor, Bill and Tom had
+joined the boys, and the five went on with the
+exploring tour, while Washington and Andy remained
+in the ship to get breakfast.</p>
+
+<p>“The inhabitants are evidently of a half-civilized
+race,” the professor said. “Their houses,
+and the manner in which they live, show them to
+be allied to the Aztecs, though of course they are
+much larger than that race.”</p>
+
+<p>“What’s bothering me,” Bill said, “is not so
+much what race they belong to, as what chance
+we’d stand in a race with them if they took it into
+their heads to chase after us. I’ve read that them
+there Azhandled races——”</p>
+
+<p>“You mean the Aztecs,” interrupted the professor.</p>
+
+<p>“Well the Aztecs, then. But I’ve read they
+used to place their enemies on a stone altar and
+cut their hearts out. Now I’m not hankerin’ after
+anything like that.”</p>
+
+<p>“Don’t be foolish,” spoke Mr. Henderson.
+“Wait until you meet some of the giants, if that
+is what they are, and then you can decide what to
+do.”</p>
+
+<p>“It may be too late then,” remarked Bill in
+a low tone, and the boys were somewhat inclined
+to agree with him.</p>
+
+<p>However, there seemed to be no immediate danger,
+as there was no sign of any of the big people
+about the village. The adventurers walked about
+for some time, but made no discoveries that would
+throw any light on the reason for the place being
+left uninhabited. It seemed as if there had been
+a sudden departure from the place, for in a number
+of the houses the remains of half-cooked meals
+were seen.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, I think we have noted enough for the
+time being,” the professor remarked, after they
+had traversed almost half the length of what
+seemed to be the principal street. “Let’s go back
+to the ship and have something to eat. Washington
+may have become alarmed at our absence.”</p>
+
+<p>They made a circle in order to take in another
+part of the town on their way back. While passing
+through a sort of alley, though it was only
+narrow by comparison with the other thoroughfares
+that were very wide, Mark came to a place
+where there was a circular slab of stone, resting
+on the ground. In the centre was a big iron ring.</p>
+
+<p>“Hello! Here’s something new!” he exclaimed.
+“Maybe it leads to a secret passage, or covers
+some hidden treasure.”</p>
+
+<p>“I guess it will have to continue to cover it
+then,” Jack spoke. “That probably weighs several
+tons. None of us could move it.”</p>
+
+<p>They made their way back to the ship, where
+they found Washington and Andy discussing the
+advisability of going off in search of them.</p>
+
+<p>“Breakfast is mighty near spoiled,” said the
+colored man with an injured air.</p>
+
+<p>But the travelers did full justice to the meal,
+notwithstanding this. Deciding there was nothing
+to be gained by staying in that vicinity, the professor
+started the ship off again.</p>
+
+<p>They traveled several hundred miles in the air,
+and, as the afternoon was coming to a close, Jack,
+who was in charge of the conning tower, spied,
+just ahead of them, another village.</p>
+
+<p>“We will descend there for the night,” the professor
+said. “Does there seem to be any sign of
+life about?”</p>
+
+<p>“None,” replied Mark, who was observing
+through a telescope the town they were approaching.
+“It’s as dead as the other one.”</p>
+
+<p>The airship settled down in a field back of
+some of the mound houses.</p>
+
+<p>“Now for supper!” cried Jack. “I’m as
+hungry as——”</p>
+
+<p>He stopped short, for, seeming to rise from the
+very ground, all about the ship, there appeared a
+throng of men. And such men as they were!
+For not one was less than ten feet tall, and some
+were nearly fifteen!</p>
+
+<p>“The giants have us!” cried Bill, as he saw the
+horde of creatures surrounding the ship.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch25' class='c008'>CHAPTER XXV<br /><br />HELD BY THE ENEMY</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>“Keep the doors closed!” cried the professor.
+“It is our only hope! I will send the ship up
+again!”</p>
+
+<p>But it was too late. Washington, who had
+obeyed the signal from the conning tower to shut
+off the engines, had disconnected most of them
+so they could not be started again save from the
+main room. At the same time there came a yell
+of dismay from the colored man, who had slid
+back the steel covering of the main side entrance
+to the <em>Mermaid</em>.</p>
+
+<p>“I’m caught!” cried Washington.</p>
+
+<p>As the professor and the boys hurried from the
+tower, they could hear a struggle from where
+Washington was, and his voice calling:</p>
+
+<p>“Let me go! Let me go!”</p>
+
+<p>Reaching the engine room, which opened directly
+on the side entrance, the professor saw a pair of
+enormous hands and arms dragging poor Washington,
+feet first, out of the ship. Bill and Tom were
+crouched in one corner, pale with fright.</p>
+
+<p>“Wait until I get my gun!” cried Andy, as he
+ran for his rifle.</p>
+
+<p>“Hold on!” called the professor in a loud voice.
+“It will be folly to shoot them! We must try
+strategy!”</p>
+
+<p>Washington’s cries ceased as he was drawn entirely
+from the ship, the giant hands disappearing
+at the same time.</p>
+
+<p>“Follow me!” yelled Mr. Henderson, running
+out of the door.</p>
+
+<p>Hardly knowing what they did, the boys went
+after him, and their hearts almost stopped beating
+in fright as they saw the terrible things, which, in
+the glare of the changing lights, were on every
+side of them.</p>
+
+<p>For the men were very repulsive looking. They
+were attired in clothes, very similar in cut to those
+worn by the travelers, and which seemed to be made
+of some sort of cloth. But they were loose and
+baggy and only added to the queer appearance of
+the giants. Veritable giants they were too.
+Their faces seemed as large as kegs, and they were
+so clumsy in shape that Mark, even, frightened as
+he was, exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>“They look like men made of putty!” At the
+same time he saw they bore a resemblance to the
+creature he had observed on the hill top.</p>
+
+<p>“What shall we do?” asked Andy of the
+professor. “They are really carrying Washington
+away!”</p>
+
+<p>Three of the giants were dragging the colored
+man along the ground, while the other terrible beings
+stood about as if waiting to see the outcome
+of the first sally.</p>
+
+<p>“I will try to speak to them,” Mr. Henderson
+said. “I know several languages. They may
+understand one.”</p>
+
+<p>But before he could start on his parley a surprising
+thing happened. There was a struggle in
+the little group about Washington. The colored
+man seemed to be fighting, though the odds, it
+would appear, were too great to enable him to accomplish
+anything. But, making a desperate effort
+to escape, Washington quickly wrenched himself
+free from the giants’ hands and then, striking
+out with his fists, knocked the three down, one after
+another.</p>
+
+<p>“I never knew Washington was so strong!” exclaimed
+Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“Nor I,” put in Mark. “Why I should think
+the men could carry him in one arm as if he was
+a baby.”</p>
+
+<p>The three giants rose slowly to their feet.
+They uttered strange cries, and motioned with their
+hands toward the professor, the boys, and the
+others in the crowd.</p>
+
+<p>“Look out! They’re goin’ t’ grab yo’!” cried
+Washington.</p>
+
+<p>Three of the giants approached Mark, and a
+like number closed in on Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“Back to the ship!” cried the professor. “We
+must defend ourselves!”</p>
+
+<p>But by this time the big men had grabbed the
+two boys. Then a strange thing took place. Mark
+and Jack, though they felt that the giants must
+overcome them in a test of strength, struggled with
+all their might against being captured. They
+fought, as a cornered rat will fight, though it knows
+the odds to be overwhelming. But in this case the
+unexpected happened.</p>
+
+<p>Both boys found they could easily break the
+holds of the giants, and Mark, by a vigorous effort,
+pushed the three men away from him, one at
+a time violently so that they fell in a heap, one on
+top of the other.</p>
+
+<p>“Hurrah! We can fight ’em!” cried Mark.
+“Don’t be afraid. They’re like mush! They’re
+putty men!”</p>
+
+<p>And, so it seemed, the giants were. Though
+big in size they were flabby and had nothing like
+the muscle they should have had in proportion to
+their build. They went down like meal sacks and
+were slow to rise.</p>
+
+<div class='c000'>
+<a href='images/illus-193f.jpg'><img src='images/illus-193.jpg' alt='' class='c014' /></a>
+<p class='c015'>THE BIG MEN HAD GATHERED IN A COMPACT MASS</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>Jack, seeing how successful his comrade was,
+attacked the three giants who were striving to make
+him a captive. He succeeded in disposing of
+them, knocking one down so hard that the man
+was unable to rise until his companions helped him.</p>
+
+<p>“That’s the way!” cried Washington.
+“They’re soft as snow men!”</p>
+
+<p>The vanquished giants set up a sort of roar,
+which was answered by their fellows, and soon
+there was a terrible din.</p>
+
+<p>“All get together!” called the professor.
+“They are evidently going to make a rush for us.
+If we stand by one another we may fight them off,
+though they outnumber us a hundred to one. Besides
+it will soon be dark, and we may be able to
+escape!”</p>
+
+<p>Washington, Jack and Mark retreated toward
+the ship, in the direction of which the others had
+also made their way. The big men had gathered in
+a compact mass and were advancing on the adventurers.</p>
+
+<p>“What do you suppose makes them so soft?”
+asked Mark. “I believe I could manage half a dozen.”</p>
+
+<p>“It must be the effect of the climate and conditions
+here,” the professor replied. “Probably
+they have to be big to stand the pressure of the
+thick water, and the increased attraction of gravitation.
+Then too, being without the weight of the
+atmosphere to which we are accustomed, they have
+probably expanded. If they were to go up to
+earth, they might shrink to our size.”</p>
+
+<p>“Do you think that possible?”</p>
+
+<p>“Of course. Why do you ask?”</p>
+
+<p>“Nothing in particular,” replied Mark. But
+to himself, he added: “That would explain it
+all.”</p>
+
+<p>It was getting dusk now. The travelers had
+reached their ship, and rushed inside and tried to
+close the doors in the face of the advancing horde.
+But, by this time the giants were so close that one
+or two of them thrust their big feet in, and prevented
+this movement. At the same time they set
+up a great howling.</p>
+
+<p>“Quick!” cried the professor. “We must
+start the ship and get away!”</p>
+
+<p>“I can’t close the door!” yelled Washington,
+who had been the last to enter.</p>
+
+<p>“Never mind that! <em>Go</em> up with it open!
+Drag them along if they won’t let go!” answered
+Mr. Henderson, as he ran toward the engine room.</p>
+
+<p>There was a sudden rush among the giants, and
+a sound as if something was being thrown over the
+top and ends of the ship. Mark turned the gas
+machine on, while Jack worked the negative gravity
+apparatus. They waited for the ship to rise.</p>
+
+<p>“Why don’t we go up?” asked the professor.</p>
+
+<p>“'Cause they’ve caught us!” called out Washington.</p>
+
+<p>“Caught us? How?”</p>
+
+<p>“They’ve thrown ropes over the top and ends
+of the ship, and fastened them to their big
+houses!”</p>
+
+<p>Running to a side window the professor saw
+that the <em>Mermaid</em> was fastened down by a score
+of cables, each one six inches thick. They were
+held captives by the enemy.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch26' class='c008'>CHAPTER XXVII<br /><br />A FRIEND INDEED</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>Though the giants, man for man, were no
+match for the travelers, collectively the horde
+proved too much. They had swarmed about the
+ship, and, by passing the big cables over her, effectively
+held her down.</p>
+
+<p>“Let me get out and I’ll cut ’em!” cried Andy.
+“We must get away from these savages!”</p>
+
+<p>“No, no, don’t go out!” exclaimed the professor.
+“They would eventually kill you, though
+you might fight them off for a time. We must
+wait and see what develops. They can have no
+object in harming us, as we have not injured
+them.”</p>
+
+<p>“I’d rather fight ’em,” insisted the old hunter.</p>
+
+<p>But the professor had his way and Andy was
+forced to obey. The giants had withdrawn their
+big feet from the side door and Washington had
+closed it. But nothing else had been accomplished,
+and the ship could not rise. The gas and negative
+gravity machines were stopped, as they were
+only under a useless strain.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly, the colored lights which had been
+growing dimmer and dimmer, with the approach
+of night, went out altogether. Almost as suddenly,
+Mark, who was watching the giants from
+the conning tower, as they made fast the loose ends
+of the cables, saw them make a dash for the mound
+houses.</p>
+
+<p>“They’re afraid of the dark!” he cried.
+“Come on! We can go out now and loosen the
+ropes!“</p>
+
+<p>He hurried to tell the professor what he had
+noticed.</p>
+
+<p>“Good!” exclaimed Mr. Henderson. “Perhaps
+we can escape now!”</p>
+
+<p>They waited a few minutes, listening to the
+sound of many big feet running away from the
+ship, and then, Bill cautiously opened the side door.
+The others were behind him, waiting, with knives
+and hatchets in their hands, to rush out and cut the
+restraining cables.</p>
+
+<p>“All ready!” called Bill. “There doesn’t
+seem to be a one in sight!”</p>
+
+<p>He stepped out but no sooner had he set foot
+on the ground than there came a thud, and Bill
+went down as if some one had knocked his feet
+from under him.</p>
+
+<p>“Go back! Go back!” he cried. “They hit
+me with something. I’m being smothered!”</p>
+
+<p>“Bring a light!” cried the professor, for the
+sally had been started in the dark.</p>
+
+<p>Jack brought the portable electric it having been
+repaired and flashed it out of the door. In the
+gleam of it, Bill was seen lying prostrate, half covered
+by an orange, about half as big as himself.
+The fruit was as soft and mushy as some of the
+giants themselves, or Bill would not have fared so
+easily.</p>
+
+<p>Then, as the others stood watching, and while
+Bill arose and wiped some of the juice from his
+face, there came a regular shower of the monstrous
+oranges.</p>
+
+<p>“Get inside quick! We’ll be smothered under
+them!” Mr. Henderson cried.</p>
+
+<p>Pausing only to rescue Bill, the adventurers retreated
+inside the ship, and made fast the door.
+Outside they could hear the thud as the oranges
+were thrown, some hitting the <em>Flying Mermaid</em> and
+many dropping all about her.</p>
+
+<p>“I guess they are going to have things their
+own way,” observed Bill, as he gazed down on
+his clothes, which were covered with juice from the
+fruit.</p>
+
+<p>The night was one of anxiety. The travelers
+took turns standing guard, but nothing more occurred.
+The giants remained in their houses, and
+the heavy ropes still held the ship fast.</p>
+
+<p>“We must hold a council of war,” the professor
+decided as they gathered at breakfast, which
+was far from a cheerful meal.</p>
+
+<p>With the return of the colored lights the giants
+again made their appearance. They came swarming
+from the mound houses, and a great crowd
+they proved to be. Several thousand at least, Jack
+estimated, and when he went up into the conning
+tower and took a survey he could see the strange
+and terrible creatures pouring in from the surrounding
+country.</p>
+
+<p>“I’m afraid there will be trouble,” he said,
+as he came down and reported what he had
+seen.</p>
+
+<p>“We must hold a council of war,” repeated
+the professor. “Has any one anything to suggest?”</p>
+
+<p>“Get a lot of powder and blow ’em up!” cried
+Andy.</p>
+
+<p>“Arrange electric wires and shock ’em to
+death!” was Bill’s plan.</p>
+
+<p>“Can’t we slip the ropes in some way and escape?” asked Jack.
+“I don’t believe we can successfully
+fight the giants. They are too many,
+even if they are weak, individually.”</p>
+
+<p>“I think you’re right there,” Mr. Henderson
+said. “We must try some sort of strategy, but
+what? That is the question.”</p>
+
+<p>For a few minutes no one spoke. They were
+all thinking deeply, for their lives might hang in
+the balance.</p>
+
+<p>“I think I have a plan,” said Mark, at length.
+“Did we bring any diving suits with us?”</p>
+
+<p>“There may be one or two,” the professor replied.
+“But what good will they do?”</p>
+
+<p>“Two of us could put them on,” continued
+Mark, “and, as they afford good protection from
+any missiles like fruit, we could crawl out on the
+deck of the ship. From there, armed with
+hatchets or knives we could cut the ropes. Then
+the ship could rise.”</p>
+
+<p>“That’s a good plan!” cried the scientist.
+“We’ll try it at once!”</p>
+
+<p>Search revealed that two diving suits were among
+the stores of the <em>Mermaid</em>. Jack and Mark
+wanted to be the ones to don them, but as the suits
+were rather large, and as the professor thought
+it would take more strength than the boys had
+to do the work, it was decided that Andy and
+Washington should make the attempt to cut the
+ropes.</p>
+
+<p>The hunter and colored man lost little time in
+getting into the modern armor. In the meanwhile
+Jack, who had been posted as a lookout, reported
+that there seemed to be some activity among
+the giants. They were running here and there,
+and some seemed to be going off toward the woods,
+that were not far away.</p>
+
+<p>“Now work quickly,” urged the professor.
+“We will be on the watch, and as soon as the last
+rope is cut we will start the machinery and send the
+ship up. We will not wait for you to come back
+inside, so hold fast as best you can when the <em>Mermaid</em>
+rises.”</p>
+
+<p>“We will,” answered Andy, just before the big
+copper helmet was fastened on his head, and Washington
+nodded to show he understood.</p>
+
+<p>The two who were to attempt the rescue of their
+comrades were soon on deck. In the conning
+tower Jack and the professor kept anxious watch,
+while Mark, Bill and Tom were at the various
+machines, ready, at the signal, to start the engines.</p>
+
+<p>The giants had now become so interested in
+whatever plan they had afoot, that they paid little
+attention to the ship. Consequently Washington
+and Andy, crawling along the deck in their diving
+suits, did not, at first attract any attention.</p>
+
+<p>In fact they had cut several of the big ropes, and
+it began to look as if the plan would succeed, particularly
+as they were partly hidden from view by
+the upper gas holder. They were working with
+feverish haste, sawing away at the big cables with
+keen knives.</p>
+
+<p>“I guess we’ll beat ’em yet!” cried Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“I hope so,” replied the professor. “It
+looks——”</p>
+
+<p>He stopped short, for at that moment a cry arose
+from the midst of the giants, and one of them
+pointed toward the ship. An instant later the air
+was darkened with a flight of big oranges, which
+the queer creatures seemed to favor as missiles.
+Probably they found stones too heavy.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, those things can’t hurt ’em much with
+those heavy suits on,” observed Mr. Henderson.
+“There, Washington got one right on the head
+that time, and it didn’t bother him a bit.”</p>
+
+<p>Jack had seen the fruit strike the big copper
+helmet and observed that the colored man only
+moved his head slightly in order to get rid of the
+orange.</p>
+
+<p>In fact the giants, seeing for themselves that
+this mode of warfare was not going to answer,
+since the two men on the ship continued to cut the
+restraining cables, gave it up. There was a good
+deal of shouting among them, and a number ran
+here and there, seemingly gathering up long poles.</p>
+
+<p>“I wonder if they are going to try the flailing
+method, and beat poor Andy and Washington,”
+said Mr. Henderson. “It looks so.”</p>
+
+<p>The two rescuers were now about a quarter
+through their hard task. The throwing of the
+oranges had ceased. But the giants were up to a new
+trick. They divided into two sections, one taking
+up a position on one side of the ship, and the other
+on the opposite. There were about two hundred
+in each crowd, while the others in the horde drew
+some distance back.</p>
+
+<p>“They’re up to some queer dodge,” observed
+Jack. “What are they placing those sticks to
+their mouths for?”</p>
+
+<p>The professor observed the throng curiously for
+a few seconds. Then he exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>“They are using blow-guns! They are going
+to shoot arrows at Washington and Andy! We
+must get them in at once!”</p>
+
+<p>He darted toward a door that opened from the
+conning tower out on the deck.</p>
+
+<p>“Don’t go!” cried Jack. “It’s too late!
+They are beginning to blow!”</p>
+
+<p>He pointed to the throng of giants. The professor
+could see their cheeks puffed out as the big
+creatures filled their lungs with air and prepared
+to expel it through the hollow tubes.</p>
+
+<p>Then there came a sound as if a great wind was
+blowing. It howled and roared over the ship, not
+unlike a hurricane in its fury. But there was no
+flight of arrows through the air, such as would
+have come from regular blow guns.</p>
+
+<p>“That is strange,” said the professor. He
+thought for a moment. “I have it!” he cried,
+“They are trying to blow Washington and Andy
+off the ship by the power of their breaths! They
+are not blowing arrows at them! My, but they,
+must have strong lungs!”</p>
+
+<p>And, in truth, that was the plan of the giants.
+The hollow tubes, made from some sort of big
+weed, sent a blast of air at the two men on the
+ship’s deck, that made them lie flat and cling with
+both hands to avoid being sent flying into the midst
+of the giants, on one side or the other. But the
+giants had reckoned without the weight of the
+diving suits, and it was those, with the big lead
+soles of the shoes, that helped to hold Washington
+and Andy in place.</p>
+
+<p>“Come back! Come back!” cried the professor,
+opening the conning tower door and calling to
+the two brave men. “Come back, both of you!
+Do you hear?”</p>
+
+<p>As the portal slid back the rush of air was almost
+like that of a cyclone. Then it suddenly
+ceased, as the giants saw their plan was not likely
+to succeed.</p>
+
+<p>But now there arose from the outer circle of the
+horde a shout of triumph. It was caused by the
+return of those who had, a little while before, hurried
+off to the woods. They came back bearing
+big trees, tall and slender, stripped of their
+branches, so that they resembled flag staffs. It
+took a dozen giants to carry each one.</p>
+
+<p>The whole throng was soon busy laying the poles
+in a row in front of the ship.</p>
+
+<p>“What can they be up to now?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“It looks as if they were going to slide the ship
+along on rollers,” the professor replied.</p>
+
+<p>Sure enough this was the giant’s plan. A few
+minutes later those in the <em>Mermaid</em> felt her moving
+forward, as the giants, massed behind, shoved.
+On to the poles she slid. The ropes were loosened
+to permit this, but not enough to enable the boat
+to rise.</p>
+
+<p>Then the travelers felt the ship being lifted up.</p>
+
+<p>“They are going to carry us away, with the
+poles for a big stretcher!” cried the professor.</p>
+
+<p>Looking from the side windows the boys saw
+that a great crowd of the big men were on either
+side of the <em>Mermaid</em>, each giant grasping a pole,
+and lifting. Farther out were others, holding the
+ends of the cables which Washington and Andy
+had not succeeded in cutting.</p>
+
+<p>The ship was being carried along by a thousand
+or more giants, as the ancient warriors, slain in
+battle, were carried home on the spears of their
+comrades.</p>
+
+<p>“This is the end of the <em>Mermaid</em>!” murmured
+Mr. Henderson in sorrowful tones.</p>
+
+<p>As they looked from the conning tower the professor
+and the two boys observed a commotion
+among the leaders of the giants. They seemed
+to be wavering. Suddenly the forward part of
+the ship sank, as those ahead laid their poles down
+on the ground. Then those behind did the same,
+and the <em>Mermaid</em>, came to a stop, and once more
+rested on the earth.</p>
+
+<p>“What does this mean?” asked the scientist in
+wonder.</p>
+
+<p>All at once the entire crowd of giants threw
+themselves down on their faces, and there, standing
+at the bow of the ship, was a giant, half again as
+large as any of the others. He was clad in a complete
+suit of golden armor on which the changing
+lights played with beautiful effect, and in his hand
+he held an immense golden sword. He pointed
+the weapon at the ship as if he had raised it in protection,
+and his hand was stretched in commanding
+gesture over the prostrate giants.</p>
+
+<p>“Perhaps he has come to save us!” cried Mark.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch27' class='c008'>CHAPTER XXVII<br /><br />A GREAT JOURNEY</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>Such indeed, seemed to be the case. The
+golden-armored giant, after standing for a few moments
+in an attitude of command, waved his sword
+three times about his head, and uttered a command,
+in a voice that sounded like thunder. Then the
+prostrate ones arose, and, making low bows hurried
+away in all directions.</p>
+
+<p>Watching them disappear, the golden one
+sheathed his weapon and approached the ship.
+He caught sight of the professor and the two boys
+in the conning tower, for Mark had gone there
+when he found the ship being transported, and
+held up his two hands, the palms outward.</p>
+
+<p>“It is the sign of peace in the language all natives
+employ,” said the professor. “I think I
+shall trust him.”</p>
+
+<p>Followed by the boys he descended from the
+little platform in the tower, and to the door that
+opened on the deck.</p>
+
+<p>“Shall we go out?” he asked.</p>
+
+<p>“We can’t be much worse off,” replied Mark.
+“Let’s chance it.”</p>
+
+<p>So, not without many misgivings, they slid back
+the portal and stepped out to face the strange and
+terrible being who had so suddenly come to their
+rescue.</p>
+
+<p>The giant in the golden armor did not seem
+surprised to see them. In fact he acted as though
+he rather expected them. He continued to hold
+up one hand, with the palm, outward, while, with
+the other, he removed his helmet and bowed low.
+Then he cast his sword on the ground and advanced
+toward the ship. When within ten feet he
+sat down on the ground, and this brought his head
+nearer the earth, so that his auditors could both
+see and hear him to better advantage.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the giant saw the travelers were outside
+their ship he began to speak to them in a voice,
+which, though he might have meant it to be low
+and gentle, was like the bellowing of a bull. At
+the same time he made many gestures, pointing to
+the ship, to himself and to Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“What is he saying, professor?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“I can’t understand all he says,” Mr. Henderson
+replied. “He uses some words derived from
+the Latin and some from the Greek. But by
+piecing it out here and there, and by interpreting
+his motions I am able to get at something.”</p>
+
+<p>“And what is it all about?”</p>
+
+<p>“It is a strange story,” the scientist replied.
+“He has only gone about half way through it.
+Wait until he finishes and I will tell you.”</p>
+
+<p>The golden-armored giant, who had stopped in
+his narrative while Jack was speaking, resumed.
+His gestures became more rapid, and his words
+came faster. Several times Mr. Henderson held
+up his hand for him to cease, while he puzzled out
+what was meant.</p>
+
+<p>At one point, the professor seemed much startled,
+and motioned for the strange being to repeat
+the last part of his discourse. When this had been
+done Mr. Henderson shook his head as though in
+doubt.</p>
+
+<p>At length the story was finished, and the lone
+giant, for there were no others in sight now, folded
+his arms and seemed to await what the professor’s
+answer might be. Mr. Henderson turned to the
+boys, and to the others of the <em>Mermaid’s</em> company,
+who, by this time, had joined him, and said:</p>
+
+<p>“Friends, I have just listened to a strange story.
+It is so strange that, but for the fact that our own
+adventures are verging on the marvelous, I could
+hardly believe it. In the first place, this man here
+is the king of this country. That is why all the
+other natives obeyed him.</p>
+
+<p>“In the second place it seems he has been a
+passenger in our boat, and came here from the
+earth’s surface with us!”</p>
+
+<p>“What’s that?” cried Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“That explains the strange happenings!” ejaculated
+Mark. “No wonder I could never solve
+the secret of the storeroom.”</p>
+
+<p>“You are right, it does,” replied Mr. Henderson.
+“I will not go into all the details of how
+it happened, but it seems the big hole through
+which we came is only one of two entrances to this
+inner world. Rather it is the entrance, and there
+is another, close to it, which is the exit. Through
+the latter a big stream of water spouts up, just as
+one pours down through the opening we used.</p>
+
+<p>“Hankos, which is the name of the king, was
+for many years a student of science. He longed
+to see where the big stream of upward spurting
+water went, and wanted to know whence came the
+down-pouring one. So he undertook a daring experiment.</p>
+
+<p>“He constructed a great cylinder, and, keeping
+his plans a secret, conveyed it to the spouting
+water, entered it, and, by means of pulleys and
+levers, after he had shut himself inside, cast himself
+into the up-shooting column. He took along compressed
+air cylinders to supply an atmosphere he
+could breathe, and some food to eat, for it appears
+our giant friends are something of inventors in
+their way. The current of water bore him to the
+surface of the earth, and he was cast up on the
+ocean, in what was probably taken for a waterspout
+if any one saw it.</p>
+
+<p>“Then a strange thing happened. No sooner
+did Hankos open his cylinder, which served him
+as a boat, than he lost his gigantic size, owing to
+the difference of the two atmospheres. He became
+almost of the same size as ourselves, except
+that his skin hung in great folds on him, and he
+seemed like a wrinkled old man. His clothes
+too, were a world too large.</p>
+
+<p>“He had a terrible time before he reached shore,
+and a hard one after it, for his strange appearance
+turned almost every one against him. He was
+sorry he had ventured to solve the mystery of the
+up-shooting stream of water, for he was worse than
+an outcast.</p>
+
+<p>“Then he began to plan to get back to his own
+inner world. But he could not find the downward
+stream, and, not knowing the language of the countries
+where he landed, he had no means of ascertaining.
+He traveled from place to place, always
+seeking for something that would lead him back to
+his own country.</p>
+
+<p>“Finally he heard of us, and of our ship, though
+how I do not know, as I thought I had kept it a
+great secret. By almost superhuman struggles he
+made his way to our island. He says he concealed
+himself aboard the <em>Mermaid</em> the night before
+we sailed, but I hardly believe it possible. It
+seems——”</p>
+
+<p>“He did it, for I saw him!” interrupted Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“You saw him!” cried Mr. Henderson.</p>
+
+<p>Then Mark told of the many things that had
+puzzled him so, how he had seen the queer figure
+slinking aboard the boat, of the disappearance of
+food from time to time, and of the strange noises
+in the storeroom.</p>
+
+<p>“That bears out what he told me,” the professor
+said. “Hankos says he used to steal out nights
+and take what food he could get, and he also mentions
+some one, answering to Mark’s description,
+who nearly discovered him once as he hurried back
+into the apartment.</p>
+
+<p>“However, it seems to be true, since Mark
+confirms it. At any rate Hankos stayed in hiding,
+and made the entire trip with us, and, just as we
+all became overcome with the strange gas he escaped,
+having begun to expand to his original
+giant size, and being unable to remain any longer
+in his cramped quarters.”</p>
+
+<p>“That’s so, he did!” cried Mark. “I saw
+him come out of the place just before I lost my
+senses. It was a terrible sight, and none of you
+would believe me when I told you some of the occurrences
+afterward.”</p>
+
+<p>“You must forgive us for that,” the professor
+said. “We have learned much since then.”</p>
+
+<p>“What did Hankos do after he left the ship
+when it landed in this country?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“He traveled until he came to this village,
+which is the chief one of this country,” replied
+the professor. “Part of the time he followed
+us at a distance, being able to travel very fast.”</p>
+
+<p>Mark remembered the strange figure of a giant
+he had seen on the hill tops several times, and knew
+that he had been observing the being who had
+played such a queer part in their lives.</p>
+
+<p>“When he came back among his own people,”
+went on Mr. Henderson, “they would not receive
+him at first, believing him to be an impostor. But
+Hankos convinced them of his identity and was allowed
+to don the golden armor, which is the badge
+of kingship. He had only been in office for a
+little while when he heard of the arrival of the
+strange thing, which turned out to be our ship.
+He recognized it from the description, and, learning
+that we were likely to be sacrificed to the fury
+and ignorance of the giants, he hurried here and
+saved our lives.</p>
+
+<p>“He says he can never thank us enough for
+being the means whereby he was able to get back
+to his own country, and says the freedom of this
+whole inner world is ours. He has given orders
+that we are to go wherever we like, and none will
+molest us. He tells me the land is a wonderful
+one, compared to our own, and urges us to make a
+long journey. He would like to go with us, only,
+now that he has resumed his natural size, he can
+not get inside the ship.”</p>
+
+<p>“Hurrah for King Hankos!” cried Jack and
+the others joined him in a hearty cheer.</p>
+
+<p>The giant in the golden armor evidently understood
+the compliment which was paid him, for he
+waved his helmet in the air and responded with
+a shout of welcome that made the ground
+tremble.</p>
+
+<p>Hankos waited until the professor had translated
+all of the story to the other travelers. Then
+the genial giant began to talk some more, and the
+professor listened intently.</p>
+
+<p>“He says,” spoke Mr. Henderson to his friends,
+“that we will be supplied with all the fruit we
+want, and with the best of the houses to sleep in
+on our journey. He also tells me he has great
+stores of shining stones and piles of the metal of
+which his armor is made, and that we are welcome
+to as much as we want. If this means unlimited
+gold and diamonds, we may make our fortunes.”</p>
+
+<p>“Jest let me git ma’ hand on a few sparklers an’
+I’ll quit work!” exclaimed Washington.</p>
+
+<p>“I have told him,” the scientist went on, “that
+we will take advantage of his kind offer. We
+will start on our trip in a day or so, after we have
+looked over the ship to see if it is not damaged.
+He tells me the gold and sparkling stones are several
+thousand miles away, on top of a high mountain.
+We will make that our objective point.”</p>
+
+<p>The interview between the king and Mr. Henderson
+having ended, the former waved his sword
+in the air and the swarm of big men came back.
+They had been hiding back in the woods. Now
+their manner was very different. They carefully,
+removed the rollers and ropes, and soon there was
+brought to the adventurers an immense pile of fine
+fruits. If our friends had stayed there a year they
+could not have eaten it all. The giants were judging
+the appetites of the travelers by their own.</p>
+
+<p>That night the adventurers slept more soundly
+than they had since entering the strange world.
+They felt they had nothing to fear from the giants.
+In the morning they were not molested, though
+big crowds gathered to look at the ship. But they
+kept back a good distance. The machinery was
+found to be in good shape, save for a few repairs,
+and when these were made, the professor announced
+he would start on a long journey.</p>
+
+<p>For several weeks after that the travelers swung
+about in their ship, sometimes sailing in the air and
+again on big seas and lakes viewing the wonders
+of the inner world. They were many and varied,
+and the professor collected enough material for a
+score of books which he said he would write when
+he got back to the outer world once more.</p>
+
+<p>One afternoon, as they were sailing over a vast
+stretch of woodland, which did not seem to be inhabited,
+Mr. Henderson, looking at one of the
+gages on the wall, asked:</p>
+
+<p>“Boys do you know how far you have traveled
+underground?”</p>
+
+<p>“How far?” asked Jack, who hated to guess
+riddles.</p>
+
+<p>“More than four thousand miles,” was the answer.</p>
+
+<p>“But we haven’t come to that mountain of gold
+and diamonds,” said Mark. “I am anxious to
+see that.”</p>
+
+<p>“Have patience,” replied the professor. “I
+have not steered toward it yet. There are other
+things to see.”</p>
+
+<p>Just then Washington’s voice could be heard
+calling from the conning tower:</p>
+
+<p>“We’re coming to a big mountain!”</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch28' class='c008'>CHAPTER XXVIII<br /><br />THE TEMPLE OF TREASURE</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>“What’s that?” fairly yelled the professor.</p>
+
+<p>“We am propelling ourselves in a contiguous
+direction an’ in close proximity to an elevated portion
+of th’ earth’s surface which rises in antiguous
+proximity t’ th’ forward part of our present means
+of locomotion!” said the colored man in a loud
+voice.</p>
+
+<p>“Which means there may be a collision,” the
+professor said, as he and the boys hurried toward
+the tower.</p>
+
+<p>“Jest what I said,” retorted Washington.
+“What’ll I do?”</p>
+
+<p>“Send the ship a little higher,” answered Mr.
+Henderson. “We mustn’t hit any mountains.”</p>
+
+<p>Washington forced more gas into the holder,
+and speeded the negative gravity machine up some,
+so that the <em>Mermaid</em>, which was flying rather low,
+ascended until it was in no danger of colliding
+with the peak which reared its lofty height just
+ahead of them.</p>
+
+<p>As the ship sailed slowly over the mountain,
+Mark gazed down and exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>“Doesn’t that look like the ruins of some building?”</p>
+
+<p>The professor took a pair of field glasses from
+a rack in the wall and took a long view.</p>
+
+<p>“It must be the place,” he said in a low voice.</p>
+
+<p>“What place?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“The temple of treasure,” was the answer.
+“Hankos told me it was on top of the highest
+mountain in the land, and this must be it, for it is
+the loftiest place we have seen. But we must be
+careful, for there is danger down there.”</p>
+
+<p>“What kind?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“The place was long ago deserted by the
+giants,” Mr. Henderson went on. “Ages ago it
+was one of their storehouses for treasure, but there
+were wars among themselves, Hankos said, and
+this part of the country was laid waste. Savage
+beasts took up their abode in the temple, and since
+then, in spite of the great size of the giants, they
+have not dared to venture here. If we brave the
+animals we may have all the gold and diamonds
+we can take away.”</p>
+
+<p>“Then for one, I’m willin’ t’ go down an’ begin
+th’ extermination at once,” put in Andy. “I’ve
+always wanted t’ be rich.”</p>
+
+<p>“We must proceed cautiously,” the professor
+said. “We are ill prepared to fight any such beasts
+as we saw at the big geyser. At the same time they
+may have deserted this place. I think we will
+lower the ship down over the temple, and spend
+several hours in observation. Then, if nothing
+develops, we can enter and see if the treasure is
+there.”</p>
+
+<p>This plan was voted a good one, and the <em>Mermaid</em>
+after having been steered directly over the
+ruined temple, was brought to a halt, and enough
+gas let out so that it fell to about fifty feet in the
+air above it.</p>
+
+<p>The adventurers began their watch. The afternoon
+waned and there were no signs of any beasts
+in or about the temple.</p>
+
+<p>“I reckon we can take a chance,” said Andy,
+who was anxious to get his hands on some diamonds.</p>
+
+<p>“Better wait until morning,” counseled Mr.
+Henderson. “It will soon be dark, and it doesn’t
+look like a nice place to go stumbling about in by
+moonlight.”</p>
+
+<p>So, though all but the scientist were anxious,
+they had to wait until the night had passed. Several
+times Washington got up to see if the temple
+had, by any chance, taken wings during the long
+hours of darkness, but each time he found it was
+still in place.</p>
+
+<p>“Seems laik it’ll never come mornin’,” he said.</p>
+
+<p>But dawn came at length, and, after a hasty
+breakfast, preparations to enter the temple were
+made. Andy loaded his gun for “bear” as he
+expressed it, and the boys each took a revolver.</p>
+
+<p>The ship was lowered to as level a place as could
+be found, and then, seeing that everything was in
+readiness for a quick departure, the professor led
+the way out of the <em>Mermaid</em>.</p>
+
+<p>The entrance to the temple was through a big
+arched gateway. Some of the stones had fallen
+down, and the whole structure looked as if it might
+topple over at any moment.</p>
+
+<p>“Go carefully,” cautioned Mr. Henderson.
+“Watch on all sides and up above. Better let
+Andy and me go ahead.”</p>
+
+<p>The scientist and the old hunter led the way.
+Through the arch they went, and emerged into
+what must at one time have been a magnificent
+courtyard. Before them was the temple proper,
+a vast structure, with an opening through which
+fifty men might have marched abreast. But the
+doors were gone, and the portal was but a black
+hole.</p>
+
+<p>“I hope there ain’t any ghosts in there,” said
+Washington, with a shiver.</p>
+
+<p>“Nonsense!” exclaimed the professor. “There
+may be things as bad, but there are no such things
+as ghosts. Have your gun ready, Andy.”</p>
+
+<p>With every sense on the alert, the old hunter
+advanced. Every one was a bit nervous, and, as
+Mark and Jack afterward admitted, they half expected
+some terrible beast to rush out at them.
+But nothing of the kind happened, and they went
+into the interior of the temple.</p>
+
+<p>At first it was so dark they could see nothing.
+There were vast dim shapes on every side, and
+from the hollow echo of their footsteps they judged
+the roof must be very high and the structure big
+in every way.</p>
+
+<p>Then, as their eyes became used to the darkness,
+they could make out, up front, something like an
+altar or pulpit.</p>
+
+<p>“Perhaps that’s where they offered up the gold
+and diamonds as a sacrifice to their gods,” spoke
+Mark in a whisper.</p>
+
+<p>“Sacrifice to their gods!” came back a hundred
+echoes and the sound made every one shudder.</p>
+
+<p>“Oh!” said Washington, in a low voice.</p>
+
+<p>“Oh! Oh! Oh!” repeated the echoes in
+voices of thunder.</p>
+
+<p>“Well, this is pleasant,” spoke Andy, in his natural
+tones, and, to the surprise of all there was no
+echo. It was only when a person whispered or
+spoke low that the sound was heard. After that
+they talked naturally.</p>
+
+<p>“You stay here, and Andy and I will go up
+front and see what there is,” said Mr. Henderson.
+“Be on your guard, and if you hear us coming
+back in a hurry, run!”</p>
+
+<p>It was with no little feeling of nervousness that
+the boys, Bill, Tom and Washington watched the
+two men move off in the darkness. They could
+hear their footsteps on the stone flags and could
+dimly see them.</p>
+
+<p>“They must be almost to the altar by this
+time,” said Mark, after a long pause.</p>
+
+<p>Hardly had he spoken than there came a loud
+sound from where Mr. Henderson and Andy had
+gone. It was as if some giant wings were beating
+the air. Then came shrill cries and the voice of
+the old hunter could be heard calling:</p>
+
+<p>“Kneel down, Professor! Let me get a shot
+at the brute!”</p>
+
+<p>Those waiting in the rear of the temple huddled
+closer together. What terrible beast could have
+been aroused?</p>
+
+<p>The next instant the place seemed illuminated
+as if by a lightning flash, and a sound as of a thousand
+thunder claps resounded.</p>
+
+<p>“I think I winged him!” cried Andy’s voice,
+and the boys knew he had fired at something.</p>
+
+<p>Then there came a crash, and from the roof of
+the old temple a dozen stones toppled off to one
+side, letting in a flood of colored light.</p>
+
+<p>By this illumination could be seen, flapping
+through the big space overhead, an enormous bat,
+as large as three eagles. And, as it flew about
+in a circle it gave utterance to shrill cries.</p>
+
+<p>“Bang!” Andy’s gun spoke again, and the
+bat with a louder cry than before, darted through
+the hole in the roof made by the falling stones,
+which had been loosened by the concussion from
+the rifle.</p>
+
+<p>“Come on!” cried the old hunter. “That was
+the guardian of the treasure! We are safe now!”</p>
+
+<p>Then, in the light which streamed through the
+broken roof, the adventurers could see, heaped up
+on a great altar, behind which sat a horrible graven
+image, piles of yellow metal, and sparkling stones.
+In little heaps they were, arranged as if offerings
+to the terrible god of the giants. There were bars
+and rings of gold, dishes of odd shape, and even
+weapons. As for the sparkling stones, they were
+of many colors, but the white ones were more plentiful
+than all the others.</p>
+
+<p>“Gold and diamonds! Diamonds and gold!”
+murmured the professor. “There is the ransom
+of many kings in this ancient temple.”</p>
+
+<p>“Wish I had a big bag!” exclaimed Washington,
+as he began filling all his pockets with the
+precious metal and gems. “If I had a-thought
+I’d have brought a dress-suit case!”</p>
+
+<p>“A dress-suit case full of diamonds!” exclaimed
+Mark.</p>
+
+<p>Then he too, as did all the others, fell to filling
+his pockets with the wealth spread so lavishly before
+them. There was the riches of a whole world
+in one place and no one but themselves to take it.</p>
+
+<p>For several minutes no one spoke. The only
+sound was the rattle of the stones and the clink of
+gold, and when some of the diamonds dropped on
+the floor they did not bother to gather them up.
+There were too many on the altar.</p>
+
+<p>“We will be rich for life!” gasped old Andy,
+who had been poor all his years.</p>
+
+<p>“I can’t carry any more!” gasped Washington.
+“I’m goin’ back for——”</p>
+
+<p>What he was going back for he never said, for,
+at that instant, happening to look up at the hole in
+the roof, he gave a startled cry:</p>
+
+<p>“Here come the terrible bats!”</p>
+
+<p>They all gazed upward. Through the opening
+they could see a great flock of the awful birds,
+headed for the temple, and they were led by one
+which seemed to fly with difficulty. It was the
+guardian of the treasure that Andy had wounded.</p>
+
+<p>“Quick! We must get out of here!” shouted
+the old hunter. “They are big enough and strong
+enough to tear us all to pieces. Hurry!”</p>
+
+<p>Down the centre of the temple they rushed, and
+not a moment too soon, for, ere they had passed
+half way to the entrance, the opening in the roof
+was darkened by the coming of the bats, and soon
+the flapping of their wings awoke the thundering
+echoes in the ruined structure, while their shrill cries
+struck terror to the hearts of the travelers.</p>
+
+<p>Up to the altar circled the bats, and then wheeling
+they flapped down the dim aisles toward the
+adventurers.</p>
+
+<p>“Hurry! Hurry!” shouted Andy, who was in
+the rear.</p>
+
+<p>He raised his rifle and fired several shots into
+the midst of the terrible creatures.</p>
+
+<p>A number of the bats were wounded, and the
+others were so frightened by the sound of the
+shots and the flashes of fire that they turned back.
+This enabled the fleeing ones to gain the entrance
+to the temple, and soon they were outside.</p>
+
+<p>“To the ship!” yelled Bill.</p>
+
+<p>“There’s little danger now!” called Andy,
+panting, for the run had winded him. “They will
+hardly attack us in the light!”</p>
+
+<p>And he was right, for, though they could hear
+the bats flying about inside the temple, and uttering
+their cries, none came outside.</p>
+
+<p>But no one felt like staying near the uncanny
+structure, and little time was lost in reaching the
+<em>Mermaid</em>. Then the doors were fastened, and
+the ship was sent high up into the air.</p>
+
+<p>“Which way?” asked Jack, when Mr. Henderson
+told him to go to the conning tower and steer.</p>
+
+<p>“Back to where we first met the giants,” replied
+the professor. “We must prepare to start
+for our own earth again soon.”</p>
+
+<p>“I’ve almost forgotten how real sunlight looks,”
+thought Jack, as he headed the ship around the
+other way. As he turned the levers a big diamond
+dropped from his pocket and rolled on the floor.</p>
+
+<p>“This will be a good reminder of our trip
+though,” he added.</p>
+
+<p>The travelers, even including Mr. Henderson,
+were so taken up with their suddenly acquired riches
+that they hardly thought of meals. At the professor’s
+suggestion they tied their gold and stones up
+in small packages convenient to carry.</p>
+
+<p>“Better place them where you can grab them
+in a hurry in case of accident,” the old scientist
+went on. “Of course if there should be too bad
+an accident they would never be of any use to us
+down here, but we’ll look on the bright side of
+things.”</p>
+
+<p>“Do you anticipate any accident?” asked Jack
+anxiously.</p>
+
+<p>“No, Oh no,” replied Mr. Henderson, but
+Jack thought the aged man had something weighing
+on his mind.</p>
+
+<h2 id='ch29' class='c008'>CHAPTER XXIX<br /><br />BACK HOME—CONCLUSION</h2>
+
+<p class='c009'>On and on sped the <em>Mermaid</em>. Now that the
+travelers felt their journey accomplished they were
+anxious to begin the homeward trip. They made
+a straight course for the village where they had so
+nearly met with disaster, and where the king of
+the giants had saved them. They went in a direct
+line, and did not travel here and there, as they
+had after they left the town. Consequently they
+shortened the route by a great distance. Yet it
+was long enough, and when they finally came in
+sight of the place the dial registered a trip of
+five thousand miles underground.</p>
+
+<p>It was one evening when they landed almost at
+the spot whence they had taken flight eventually
+to reach the temple of the treasure. Most of the
+giants had betaken themselves to their mound
+houses, but Hankos was walking in the fields, and,
+when he caught sight of the airship hovering
+above him he waved his great sword in welcome.</p>
+
+<p>He rushed up to shake hands with the travelers
+when they came out of the ship, though to greet
+him it was only possible for the adventurers to
+grasp one of his immense fingers.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the greetings were over Hankos
+began to speak rapidly to the professor, at the same
+time going through many strange motions.</p>
+
+<p>“It is as I feared!” suddenly exclaimed the
+scientist.</p>
+
+<p>“What is the matter?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“The worst has happened!” went on Mr. Henderson.
+“The great hole by which we came into
+this place has been closed by an earthquake shock!”</p>
+
+<p>“The hole closed?” repeated Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“An earthquake shock!” murmured Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Then how are we going to get back to earth?”
+asked old Andy.</p>
+
+<p>A terrible fear entered the hearts of the travelers.
+The closing of the opening by which they
+had come to the strange world meant, in all probability
+that they would have to spend the rest of
+their lives in this underground place.</p>
+
+<p>“What good did it do us to get all those diamonds
+and that gold?” asked Mark in a sorrowful
+tone.</p>
+
+<p>Hankos began to speak again, using his gestures
+which were almost as eloquent as words. The
+professor watched and listened intently. Then
+there seemed to come a more hopeful look to his
+face. He nodded vigorously as Hankos went on
+with what seemed to be an explanation.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s worth trying, at all events!” the scientist
+exclaimed. “It is our only hope!”</p>
+
+<p>“What is?” asked Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“Friends,” began the professor in solemn tones.
+“I must admit our plight is desperate. At the
+same time there is a bare chance of our getting
+back to our own earth. As you remember, Hankos
+went from this place to the upper regions through
+the upward spouting column of water.”</p>
+
+<p>“If we had our submarine we might also,” interrupted
+Jack. “But the <em>Mermaid</em> isn’t built
+to sail in that fashion.”</p>
+
+<p>“Nor would the <em>Porpoise</em> have served us in this
+emergency,” said the professor. “It would prove
+too heavy. But, nevertheless, I think I have a
+plan. Now, Mark, you are about to learn the
+secret of the storeroom. The real one, not the
+hiding of Hankos in there, which you imagined
+to be the cause of my desire to keep something
+hidden. When we planned a trip to this underground
+world I had a dim idea that we might
+meet with trouble. So I planned and made a
+cylinder lifeboat.”</p>
+
+<p>“A cylinder lifeboat?” repeated Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Yes,” replied Mr. Henderson. “I have
+it in the storeroom. I did not want any of you
+to see it for fear you would have faint hearts.
+I thought there might be no necessity of using it.
+But, since there is, we must do our best. I will
+admit it may be a fearful ordeal, but we will have
+to risk something in order to escape.</p>
+
+<p>“I have in the storeroom a large cylinder,
+capable of holding us all. It will also contain
+food and drink for a month, but we will all have
+to go, packed almost like sardines in a box. My
+plan is to take the <em>Mermaid</em> to the place where
+the column of water shoots up. There we will
+get into the cylinder, close it, and trust ourselves
+to the terrible force that may bring us back to
+the upper world. What do you say? Shall we
+attempt it?”</p>
+
+<p>For a few seconds no one spoke. Then Jack
+said slowly:</p>
+
+<p>“I don’t see that we can do anything else. I
+don’t want to stay here all my life.”</p>
+
+<p>“I wants a chance t’ wear some of them sparklers,”
+put in Washington.</p>
+
+<p>“Then we will make the attempt,” the professor
+added. “Now all aboard for the place where
+the water shoots up!”</p>
+
+<p>Questioning Hankos, the professor learned how
+to reach the strange place. It was in the midst of
+a desolate country where none of the giants ever
+went, so afraid were they of the strange phenomenon.</p>
+
+<p>It was a week’s journey. Sometimes the <em>Mermaid</em>
+flew through the air, and again it sailed on
+vast lakes or inland seas. On the trip they met
+with big waterfalls and terrible geysers that
+spouted a mile or more into the air. They traveled
+by night as well as day, though it was necessary
+to keep a sharp watch.</p>
+
+<p>Sometimes the ship passed through great flocks
+of birds that surrounded her and sought to pierce
+the aluminum hull with their sharp beaks and talons.
+Over the mountains and valleys the ship
+sailed until, one evening, there sounded through
+the air a strange rumbling sound.</p>
+
+<p>“It is thunder,” said Old Andy.</p>
+
+<p>“It is the water column,” replied the scientist.
+“We are at the end of our trip. May the remainder
+be as successful!”</p>
+
+<p>The ship was lowered to the surface, as it was
+deemed best to approach the column when the
+lights were shining. No one slept much that
+night, for the roaring and rumbling never ceased.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning the ship was sent forward
+slowly. Ever and ever the terrific sound increased,
+until it was almost deafening. They had
+to call to each other to be heard.</p>
+
+<p>Then, as the <em>Mermaid</em> passed over a mountain,
+the adventurers saw, in a valley below them, the
+up-shooting water.</p>
+
+<p>It was a vast column, nearly three hundred feet
+in thickness, and as solid and white as a shaft <em>of</em>
+marble. Up, up, up, it went, until it was lost to
+sight, but there were no falling drops, and not
+even a spray came from the watery shafts.</p>
+
+<p>“There is a terrible power to it,” the professor
+said. “May it prove our salvation!”</p>
+
+<p>The ship was lowered about a hundred feet
+away from the waterspout. All around them the
+ground was vibrating with the force of the fluid.</p>
+
+<p>“To think that connects with the world above!”
+exclaimed Jack.</p>
+
+<p>“It’s a good thing for us that it does,” Mark
+answered.</p>
+
+<p>“We must lose no time,” the professor put in.
+“If the earthquake destroyed the downward
+shaft, it may effect this one in time. We must
+escape while we can.”</p>
+
+<p>Then, for the first time, he opened the storeroom
+and the big cylinder was disclosed to view.
+It was made of aluminum, and shaped like an immense
+cigar. The hull was double, and it was
+strongly braced. Inside were padded berths for
+the occupants, and there was just room enough for
+the seven adventurers. Once they had entered
+they could not move about, but must stay in their
+little compartment.</p>
+
+<p>Compressed air in strong cylinders furnished a
+means of breathing, and there were tiny electric
+lights operated by a storage battery. There was
+also a chamber to be filled with the lifting gas.
+The cylinder was so arranged that it would float
+on it’s long axis if thrown into the water. A trap
+door hermetically sealed gave access to the interior.
+A small propellor, worked by compressed air, furnished
+motive power.</p>
+
+<p>The food supply consisted of compressed capsules
+on which a man could subsist for several days.
+There was also some water, but not much, since
+that can not be compressed and would, therefore,
+take considerable room.</p>
+
+<p>“The only thing for us to do,” said the professor,
+“is to get into the cylinder, seal it up, and
+trust to Providence. This is what I intended to
+use when we were caught in the draught.”</p>
+
+<p>“How can we get into the column of water
+after we shut ourselves into the cylinder?” asked
+Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“The cylinder fits into a sort of improvised
+cannon,” said Mr. Henderson. “It is fired by
+electricity and compressed air. We will aim it
+at the column, press the button and be projected
+into the midst of the water. Then——” He did
+not finish the sentence, but the others knew what
+he meant.</p>
+
+<p>“When are we to start?” asked Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“As soon as possible,” replied the professor.
+“I must arrange the cylinder, compress the air and
+lay out the food supply.”</p>
+
+<p>It took the rest of the day to do this, as the
+inventor found it would be advisable to attach a
+weight to the end of the cylinder, to hold it upright
+in the column of water. The weight could
+be detached automatically when they were shot
+up into the midst of the ocean, where, as Hankos
+had told them, the column spurted forth.</p>
+
+<p>Then some food was stored in the tiny ship that
+was destined to be their last hope, and some tanks
+of water were placed in it.</p>
+
+<p>“I think we are almost ready,” Mr. Henderson
+said about noon the next day.</p>
+
+<p>“What about our gold and diamonds?” asked
+Jack suddenly. “Can we take them with us in
+the cylinder?”</p>
+
+<p>“That’s so!” exclaimed Mr. Henderson. “I
+forgot about them. I’m afraid we’ll have to leave
+the riches behind. We will not be able to carry
+them and the food we need, for it may be a week
+or more before we can leave the cylinder. Gold
+and diamonds will be a poor substitute for something
+to eat.”</p>
+
+<p>“I’m goin’ t’ take mine!” said Washington
+with much conviction. “I might as well starve
+rich as starve poor!”</p>
+
+<p>“We may be able to take a few diamonds,”
+the professor answered. “The gold will be too
+heavy. Let each one select the largest of the diamonds
+he has and put them in his pockets.”</p>
+
+<p>Then began a sorting of the wealth. It was
+strange, as they recalled afterward, throwing away
+riches that would have made millionaires envious,
+but it had to be done. All the wealth in the world
+would not equal a beef capsule when they were
+starving, and they realized it. So they only saved
+a few pieces of gold as souvenirs, and took the
+best of the diamonds. But even then they had a
+vast fortune with them.</p>
+
+<p>At last all was in readiness. The cylinder had
+been placed in the tube from which it was to be
+shot gently forth by compressed air, so that it
+would fall into the upward spouting column of
+water. The charge of compressed air was put in
+and the electric wires arranged.</p>
+
+<p>“Are we all ready?” asked Mr. Henderson.</p>
+
+<p>“I think so,” said Jack, in what sounded like
+a whisper, but which was loud, only the noise of
+the water muffled it.</p>
+
+<p>“Then we had better enter the cylinder,” spoke
+the inventor. “Take a last look at
+the <em>Flying Mermaid</em>, boys, for you will never
+see again the ship that has borne us many thousand miles.
+She served us well, and might again, but for the freak
+of nature that has placed us in this position.”</p>
+
+<p>For the first time the adventurers realized that
+they must abandon the craft in which they had
+reached the new world. So it was with no little
+feeling of sadness that they climbed up the ladder
+that had been arranged and slid down into the
+cylinder. One by one they took their places in
+the padded berths arranged for them. It was a
+snug fit, for the professor knew if there was too
+much room he and the others might be so tossed
+about as to be killed.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Henderson was the last to enter. Standing
+at the manhole he took a final look at his pet
+creation, the <em>Mermaid</em>. Through the opened windows
+the colored lights came, shifting here and
+there. Outside the terrible column of water was
+roaring as if anxious to devour them.</p>
+
+<p>“Good-bye, <em>Mermaid</em>!” said the professor
+softly.</p>
+
+<p>Then he closed down the manhole cover and
+tightened the screws that held it in place. He
+touched a button that turned on the electric lights
+and the interior of the cylinder was illuminated
+with a soft glow.</p>
+
+<p>“Are you all ready?” he asked.</p>
+
+<p>“Jest as much as I ever will be,” replied Washington,
+who, as the crisis approached, seemed more
+light-hearted than any of the others.</p>
+
+<p>“Then here we go!” exclaimed Mr. Henderson.</p>
+
+<p>His fingers touched the button that connected
+with the electric machine, which operated the compressed
+air.</p>
+
+<p>There sounded a muffled report. Then it
+seemed to those in the cylinder that the end of the
+world had come. They shot upward and outward,
+through the top of the conning tower which
+had been removed. The cylinder, launched
+straight at the column of water struck it squarely
+and, an instant later was caught in the grasp of the
+giant force and hurled toward the upper world.</p>
+
+<p>Up and up and up the mass of metal with its human
+freight went. Now it was spinning like a top,
+again it shot toward the earth’s crust like an arrow
+from the archer’s bow.</p>
+
+<p>It was moving with the velocity of a meteor,
+yet because of being surrounded with water, and
+traveling with the same velocity as the column,
+there was no friction. Had there been, the heat
+generated would have melted the case in an instant.</p>
+
+<p>For the first few seconds those in the cylinder
+were dazed by the sudden rush. Then as it became
+greater and greater there came a curious dull feeling,
+and, one after another lost consciousness. The
+terror of the water column, and the frightful speed,
+had made them senseless.</p>
+
+<hr class='c016' />
+
+<p>It seemed like a month later, though, of course,
+it could have been only a few hours or a day at
+most when Jack opened his eyes. He saw his
+companions, white and senseless all around him,
+and at first thought they were dead. Then he
+saw Mark looking at him, and Washington asked:</p>
+
+<p>“Is any one livin’ 'sides me?”</p>
+
+<p>“I am,” replied Jack decidedly.</p>
+
+<p>Then, one after another they regained their
+senses. But they were in a strange daze, for they
+were being carried along like a shooting star, only,
+as they went at the same rate as did the element
+carrying them, they did not <em>realize</em> this.</p>
+
+<p>“I think I’m hungry,” said Bill, who had the
+best appetite of any of the travelers.</p>
+
+<p>“You’ll find a beef capsule in the little compartment
+over your head,” spoke the professor.</p>
+
+<p>Bill was about to reach for it, when they were
+all startled by a sudden side motion of the cylinder.
+Then came a violent shock, and a sound as of
+splashing water. Next the cylinder seemed to be
+falling, and, a few minutes later to be shooting
+upward. Following this there was another splash
+and the cylinder began to bob about like a cork
+on a mill pond.</p>
+
+<p>“We have reached the sea! We are afloat on
+the ocean!” cried the professor.</p>
+
+<p>Hurriedly he disengaged himself from the
+straps that held him to his bunk. He pushed back
+the lever that opened the manhole. Into the opening
+glowed the glorious sunlight, while to the occupants
+came the breath of salt air.</p>
+
+<p>“Hurrah!” cried Jack. “We are safe at
+last!”</p>
+
+<p>“Safe at last!” the professor answered, and
+then they all gave a cheer.</p>
+
+<p>For their cylinder, which might now be termed
+a boat, was floating on the great Atlantic. The
+blue sky was overhead and the air of the sea fanned
+their cheeks.</p>
+
+<p>They had shot up from the underground earth,
+in the column of water, had been tossed high into
+the air, had fallen back when the liquid shaft broke
+into spray, had descended into the ocean, gone
+down a hundred feet or more, and then had shot
+up like a cork to bob about the surface.</p>
+
+<p>For a week they were afloat, and then they were
+picked up by a passing vessel, rather weak and
+very much cramped, but otherwise in good shape.
+They said nothing of their adventures, save to explain
+that they were experimenting in a new kind
+of boat. About a month later, for the ship that
+had rescued them was a slow sailer, they were back
+on the island whence that wonderful voyage was
+begun.</p>
+
+<hr class='c016' />
+
+<p>“Well, we solved the mystery of the center of
+the earth,” remarked Jack, one evening, when they
+were gathered in the old shack where so many wonderful
+adventures had been planned.</p>
+
+<p>“Yes, we did,” said Mr. Henderson. “And
+no one else is ever likely to go there.”</p>
+
+<p>“Why?”</p>
+
+<p>“Because the only way of getting there was destroyed
+by the earthquake, and no one could ever
+force his way down through that upward-shooting
+column of water.”</p>
+
+<p>“That’s so. Well, we have the diamonds, anyway,”
+spoke Mark. “They ought to make us
+rich.”</p>
+
+<p>And the jewels did, for the stones proved to be
+of great value, even though the adventurers had
+saved only a few of the many they found in the
+ruined temple.</p>
+
+<p>But there was money enough so that they all
+could live in comfort the rest of their lives. As
+the professor was getting quite old, and incapable
+of making any more wonderful inventions, he
+closed up his workshop and settled down to a quiet
+life. As for Washington, Andy, and Bill and
+Tom, they invested their money received from the
+sale of the diamonds in different business ventures,
+and each one did well.</p>
+
+<p>“I am going in for a good education,” said
+Jack to Mark.</p>
+
+<p>“Just what I am going to do,” answered his
+chum. “And after we’ve got that——” He
+paused suggestively.</p>
+
+<p>“We’ll go in for inventing airships, or something
+like that, eh?”</p>
+
+<p>“Yes. We’ve learned a great deal from Mr.
+Henderson, and in the course of time we ought to
+be able to turn out something even more wonderful
+than the <em>Electric Monarch</em>, the <em>Porpoise</em>, or the
+<em>Flying Mermaid</em>.”</p>
+
+<p>“Yes, and when we’ve invented something better——”</p>
+
+<p>“We’ll take another trip.”</p>
+
+<p>“Right you are!”</p>
+
+<p>And then the two chums shook hands warmly; and here we will say good-bye.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE END.
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<hr class='pb' />
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ <span class='larger'>NEW ALGER BOOKS</span>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ JOE, THE HOTEL BOY<br/>
+ <i>Or, Winning Out by Pluck</i><br/>
+ By HORATIO ALGER, Jr.<br/>
+ <br/>
+ Illustrated, 12mo. Cloth, 60 cents
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<div class='imgleft c017' >
+<img src='images/a251a.png' alt='' class='c018' />
+</div>
+
+<p>This is one of the last stories penned by that prince of all juvenile writers,
+Horatio Alger, Jr., and is one of his best. It describes the adventures of a
+youth brought up in the country by an old hermit. When the hermit dies the boy
+obtains work at a nearby hotel, and later on drifts to the city and obtains a
+position in another hotel. There is a mystery concerning the lad’s identity
+and likewise the disappearance of a certain blue box, but in the end all
+terminates satisfactorily.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ BEN LOGAN’S TRIUMPH<br/>
+ <i>Or, The Boys of Boxwood Academy</i><br/>
+ By HORATIO ALGER, Jr.<br/>
+ <br/>
+ Illustrated, 12mo. Cloth, 60 cents
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<div class='imgright c017' >
+<img src='images/a251b.png' alt='' class='c018' />
+</div>
+
+<p>This story was penned by Mr. Alger some years before his death, but has never
+appeared in book form. Ben was a city newsboy, rather rough, but with a heart
+of gold. He did a great service for a good-hearted farmer, and the latter took
+Ben home with him. The lad had never been in the country before, and his eyes
+were opened to a new world. Then the youth was sent to a boarding school,
+where he made his way to the front amid many difficulties. Mr. Alger’s charm
+as a juvenile writer is so well known it is needless to mention it here, and
+this story is in his best vein.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ CUPPLES &amp; LEON CO., Publishers, NEW YORK
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<hr class='pb' />
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ <span class='larger'>THE JACK RANGER SERIES</span><br/>
+ By Clarence Young<br/>
+ Author of the Motor Boys Series<br/>
+ <br/>
+ Cloth. 12mo. Illustrated, Price per volume, $1.00, postpaid
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<div class='imgleft c017' >
+<img src='images/a252.png' alt='' class='c018' />
+</div>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ JACK RANGER’S SCHOOLDAYS<br/>
+ Or, The Rivals of Washington Hall
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>You will love Jack Ranger—you simply can’t help it. He is so bright and
+cheery, and so real and lifelike. A typical boarding school tale, without a
+dull line in it.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ JACK RANGER’S SCHOOL VICTORIES<br/>
+ <i>Or, Track, Gridiron and Diamond</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>In this tale Jack gets back to Washington Hall and goes in for all sorts of
+school games. There are numerous contests on the athletic field, and also a
+great baseball game and a football game, all dear to a boy’s heart. The
+rivalry is bitter at times, and enemies try to put Jack “in a hole” more than
+once.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ JACK RANGER’S WESTERN TRIP<br/>
+ <i>Or, From Boarding School to Ranch and Range</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>This volume takes the hero and several of his chums to the great West.
+Jack is anxious to clear up the mystery surrounding his father’s
+disappearance. At the ranch and on the range adventures of the
+strenuous sort befall him.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ JACK RANGER’S OCEAN CRUISE<br/>
+ <i>Or, The Wreck of the Polly Ann</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>Here is a tale of the bounding sea, with many stirring adventures.
+How the ship was wrecked, and Jack was cast away, is told in a
+style all boys and girls will find exceedingly interesting. There is
+plenty of fun as well as excitement.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ JACK RANGER’S GUN CLUB<br/>
+ <i>Or, From Schoolroom to Camp and Trail</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>Jack, with his chums, goes in quest of big game. The boys fall in with
+a mysterious body of men, and have a terrific slide down a mountain side.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ CUPPLES &amp; LEON CO., Publishers, NEW YORK
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<hr class='pb' />
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ <span class='larger'>THE DOROTHY DALE SERIES</span><br/>
+ By Margaret Penrose<br/>
+ <br/>
+ Cloth, 12mo. Illustrated. Price per volume, 60 cents, postpaid
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ DOROTHY DALE: A GIRL OF TO-DAY
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>Dorothy is the daughter of an old Civil War veteran who is running a weekly
+newspaper in a small Eastern town. When her father falls sick, and the
+newspaper property is in danger of going to pieces, the girl shows what she
+can do to support the family.</p>
+
+<div class='imgleft c017' >
+<img src='images/a253.png' alt='' class='c018' />
+</div>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ DOROTHY DALE AT GLENWOOD SCHOOL
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>More prosperous times have come to the Dale family, and Major Dale resolves to
+send Dorothy to a boarding school to complete her education. At Glenwood
+School the girl makes a host of friends and has many good times. But some
+girls are jealous of Dorothy’s popularity, and they seek to get her into
+trouble in more ways than one.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ DOROTHY DALE’S GREAT SECRET
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>A splendid story of one girl’s devotion to another. Dorothy’s chum
+ran away to join a theatrical company. What Dorothy did, and how
+she kept the secret, makes a tale no girl will care to miss.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ DOROTHY DALE AND HER CHUMS
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>A story of school life, and of strange adventures among the gypsies.
+Dorothy befriends a little French girl and also a gypsy waif, in
+a manner sure to touch the hearts of all readers.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ DOROTHY DALE’S QUEER HOLIDAYS
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>Relates the details of a mystery that surrounded Tanglewood Park.
+There is a great snowstorm, and the young folks become snowbound,
+much to their dismay.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ CUPPLES &amp; LEON CO., Publishers, NEW YORK
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<hr class='pb' />
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ <span class='larger'>BOYS OF BUSINESS SERIES</span><br/>
+ By Allen Chapman<br/>
+ <br/>
+ Illustrated, 12mo. Cloth, 60 cents per volume
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<div class='imgleft c017' >
+<img src='images/a254.png' alt='' class='c018' />
+</div>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE YOUNG EXPRESS AGENT<br/>
+ <i>Or, Bart Stirling’s Road to Success</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>Bart’s father was the express agent in a country town. When an explosion of
+fireworks rendered him unfit for work, the boy took it upon himself to run the
+express office. The tale gives a good idea of the express business in general.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ TWO BOY PUBLISHERS<br/>
+ <i>Or, From Typecase to Editor’s Chair</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>This tale will appeal strongly to all lads who wish to know how a newspaper is
+printed and published. The two boy publishers work their way up, step by
+step, from a tiny printing office to the ownership of a town paper.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ MAIL ORDER FRANK<br/>
+ <i>Or, A Smart Boy and His Chances</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>Here we have a story covering an absolutely new field—that of the
+mail-order business. How Frank started in a small way and gradually
+worked his way tip to a business figure of considerable importance
+is told in a fascinating manner.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ A BUSINESS BOY<br/>
+ <i>Or, Winning Success</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>This relates the ups and downs of a young storekeeper. He has some
+keen rivals, but “wins out” in more ways than one. All youths who
+wish to go into business will want this volume.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ CUPPLES &amp; LEON CO., Publishers, NEW YORK
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<hr class='pb' />
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ <span class='larger'>MOTOR BOYS SERIES</span><br/>
+ <span class='smaller'>(Trade Mark, Reg. U. S. Pat. Of.)</span><br/>
+ By Clarence Young<br/>
+ <br/>
+ Cloth. 12mo. Illustrated. Price per volume. 60 cents, postpaid
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<div class='imgleft c017' >
+<img src='images/a255.png' alt='' class='c018' />
+</div>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE MOTOR BOYS<br/>
+ <i>Or, Chums Through Thick and Thin</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>In this volume is related how the three boys got
+together and planned to obtain a touring car and
+make a trip lasting through the summer.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE MOTOR BOYS OVERLAND<br/>
+ <i>Or, A Long Trip for Fun and Fortune</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>With the money won at the great motorcycle race the three boys purchase
+their touring car and commence their travels.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE MOTOR BOYS IN MEXICO<br/>
+ <i>Or, The Secret of the Buried City</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>From our own country the scene is shifted to Mexico, where the motor
+boys journey in quest of a city said to have been buried centuries ago
+by an earthquake.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE MOTOR BOYS ACROSS THE PLAINS<br/>
+ <i>Or, The Hermit of Lost Lake</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>Unraveling the mystery surrounding an old hermit and a poor boy.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE MOTOR BOYS AFLOAT<br/>
+ <i>Or, The Stirring Cruise of the Dartaway</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>In this volume the boys take to a motorboat, and have many adventures.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE MOTOR BOYS ON THE ATLANTIC<br/>
+ <i>Or, The Mystery of the Lighthouse</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>How the lads foiled the bad men who wanted to wreck a steamer by
+means of false lights is dramatically related.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE MOTOR BOYS IN STRANGE WATERS<br/>
+ <i>Or, Lost in a Floating Forest</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>Telling of many adventures in the mysterious Everglades of Florida.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE MOTOR BOYS ON THE PACIFIC<br/>
+ <i>Or, The Young Derelict Hunters</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>The derelict was of great value, and the hunt for it proved full of
+perils.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE MOTOR BOYS IN THE CLOUDS<br/>
+ <i>Or, A Trip for Fame and Fortune</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>The boys fall in with an inventor and invest in a flying machine. After
+a number of stirring adventures in the clouds they enter a big race.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ CUPPLES &amp; LEON CO., Publishers, NEW YORK
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<hr class='pb' />
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ <span class='larger'>THE BOY HUNTERS SERIES</span><br/>
+ By Captain Ralph Bonehill<br/>
+ <br/>
+ Cloth. 15mo. Illustrated. Price per volume, 60 cents, postpaid
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<div class='imgleft c017' >
+<img src='images/a256.png' alt='' class='c018' />
+</div>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ FOUR BOY HUNTERS<br/>
+ <i>Or, The Outing of the Gun Club</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>A fine, breezy story of the woods and waters, of adventures in search of game,
+and of great times around the campfire, told in Captain Bonehill’s best style.
+In the book are given full directions for camping out.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ GUNS AND SNOWSHOES<br/>
+ <i>Or, The Winter Outing of the Young Hunters</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>In this volume the young-hunters leave home for a winter outing on the shores
+of a small lake. They hunt and trap to their heart’s content, and have
+adventures in plenty, all calculated to make boys “sit up and take notice.” A
+good healthy book; one with the odor of the pine forests and the glare of the
+welcome campfire in every chapter.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ YOUNG HUNTERS OF THE LAKE<br/>
+ <i>Or, Out with Rod and Gun</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>Another tale of woods and waters, with some strong hunting scenes and a good
+deal of mystery. The three volumes make a splendid outdoor series.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ OUT WITH GUN AND CAMERA<br/>
+ <i>Or, The Boy Hunters in the Mountains</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>Takes up the new fad of photographing wild animals as well as shooting them.
+An escaped circus chimpanzee and an escaped lion add to the interest of the
+narrative.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ CUPPLES &amp; LEON CO., Publishers, NEW YORK
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<hr class='pb' />
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ <span class='larger'>THE DAREWELL CHUMS SERIES</span><br/>
+ By Allen Chapman<br/>
+ <br/>
+ Cloth. 12mo. Illustrated. 60 cents each, postpaid.
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE DAREWELL CHUMS<br/>
+ <i>Or, The Heroes of the School</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>A bright, lively story for boys, telling of the doings of four chums, at
+school and elsewhere. There is a strong holding plot, and several
+characters who are highly amusing. Any youth getting this book will
+consider it a prize and tell all his friends about it.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE DAREWELL CHUMS IN THE CITY<br/>
+ <i>Or, The Disappearance of Ned Wilding</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>From a country town the scene is changed to a great city. One of
+the chums has disappeared in an extraordinary manner, and the others
+institute a hunt for him. The youths befriend a city waif, who in turn
+makes a revelation which clears up the mystery.</p>
+
+<div class='imgleft c017' >
+<img src='images/a257.png' alt='' class='c018' />
+</div>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ DAREWELL CHUMS IN THE WOODS<br/>
+ <i>Or, Frank Roscoe’s Secret</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>The boys had planned for a grand outing when
+something happened of which none of them
+had dreamed. They thought one of their
+number had done a great wrong—at least, it
+looked so. But they could not really believe the
+accusations made, so they set to work to help
+Frank all they could. All went camping some
+miles from home, and when not hunting and
+fishing spent their time in learning the truth of
+what had occurred.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ THE DAREWELL CHUMS ON A CRUISE<br/>
+ <i>Or, Fenn Masterson’s Odd Discovery</i>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>A tale of the Great Lakes. The boys run across some Canadian
+smugglers and stumble on the secret of a valuable mine. Some
+curious adventures underground are well told.</p>
+
+<div class='nf-center-c'>
+ <div class='nf-center'>
+ CUPPLES &amp; LEON CO., Publishers, NEW YORK
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's Five Thousand Miles Underground, by Roy Rockwood
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FIVE THOUSAND MILES UNDERGROUND ***
+
+***** This file should be named 4994-h.htm or 4994-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+ http://www.gutenberg.org/4/9/9/4994/
+
+Produced by Jim Weiler and Roger Frank
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
+ www.gutenberg.org/license.
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809
+North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email
+contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the
+Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+ </body>
+ <!-- created with fpn.py 1.25 on 2014-01-26 15:31:40 GMT -->
+</html>
diff --git a/4994-h/images/a251a.png b/4994-h/images/a251a.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5cbc4a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/a251a.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/a251b.png b/4994-h/images/a251b.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..832fa51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/a251b.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/a252.png b/4994-h/images/a252.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..035d220
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/a252.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/a253.png b/4994-h/images/a253.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73a0d16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/a253.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/a254.png b/4994-h/images/a254.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..98115cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/a254.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/a255.png b/4994-h/images/a255.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba18e41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/a255.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/a256.png b/4994-h/images/a256.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0de62da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/a256.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/a257.png b/4994-h/images/a257.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ffeda64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/a257.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/cover.jpg b/4994-h/images/cover.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fb7a92f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/cover.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/illus-046.jpg b/4994-h/images/illus-046.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bd5b665
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/illus-046.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/illus-046f.jpg b/4994-h/images/illus-046f.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dfce20e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/illus-046f.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/illus-180.jpg b/4994-h/images/illus-180.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2b7becc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/illus-180.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/illus-180f.jpg b/4994-h/images/illus-180f.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a67b3b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/illus-180f.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/illus-193.jpg b/4994-h/images/illus-193.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..123874e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/illus-193.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/illus-193f.jpg b/4994-h/images/illus-193f.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a66256
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/illus-193f.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg b/4994-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3243458
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/4994-h/images/illus-fpcf.jpg b/4994-h/images/illus-fpcf.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..370b9fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4994-h/images/illus-fpcf.jpg
Binary files differ